Home

Ford 2009 E-150 Automobile User Manual

1. The high current fuses are coded as follows Fuse Relay Protected Circuits Location Rating 1 icro Relay Powertrain Control Module PCM Starter solenoid Wiper Micro Relay Micro Relay Modified vehicle and stripped chassis run start SO IDM relay Diesel engine only SIS S S S S S _ gt o6 ololololo a 3 3 3 3 3 a o olololele DIDID Dia a E ololo lojolo S amp is sis s s zz fe e fe fx A Modified vehicle and stripped chassis run start 4 40A Run start relay 4 A Modified vehicle and stripped chassis battery A Auxiliary A C blower 229 I a 30A 0 5 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Protected Circuits Eede Le 17 5OA Auxiliary battery feed Trailer tow Bd battery charge trailer tow park feed 18 30A Electric trailer brake Trailer O08 oT eee PC Noted 26 o Noted PC Notus A C clutch BOO switch 31 10A Cluster battery stripped chassis only IDM coil diesel engine only 36 20A Ignition switch Stripped chassis only 230 2009 Econoline eco Owners G
2. Orange Green Green Red Hed Red Bue Yellow Yellow Tn Brown News Black Black Passenger compartment fuse panel The fuse panel is located to the left of the brake pedal and mounted onto the lower left cowl panel Remove the fuse panel cover to access the fuses 225 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies WARNING Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current fuses If your vehicle is equipped with an auxiliary battery disconnecting the primary under hood battery DOES NOT remove power from all circuits To remove a fuse use the fuse puller tool provided on the inside of the fuse panel cover par e Joo n bs ES Dy ml fro fw fro m Jo l e c i e Jel jo fel B JB E C46 C45 Cua 43 s i B onl Kel co rs io 1 C a 27 28 5 B The fuses are coded as follows Location Rating Not used spare Not used spare SPDJB Brake shift interlock 226 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Protected Circuits Le amp m 6 20A Turn signal Hazard Stop lamps 7 10A PLeftlowbeam O 8 10A fRightlowbeam 9 SA Courtesylamps Not used spare High beams 35 10A Reverse park aid Rear
3. sssseeeee 112 driver airbag es tees 110 indicator light 112 ODOFAUlOI sacsisceeicessanssncwreeersenneds 110 passenger airbag 110 passenger deactivation SWILE 2 ceci edente 113 Ambulance packages 8 Antifreeze see Engine coolant 275 Anti lock brake system see Brakes 195 196 Anti theft system 86 arming the system 87 Audio system see Radio emus 20 22 27 Automatic transmission driving an automatic overdrive 207 209 212 fluid adding crees 296 fluid checking 296 fluid refill capacities 303 fluid specification 303 Auxiliary Input Jack 34 Auxiliary power point 61 Axle lubricant specifications 303 refill capacities 303 traction lok ssssss 203 316 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus B Battery sanum iei toes 272 acid treating emergencies 272 jumping a disabled battery 242 maintenance free 272 replacement specifications 302 S rVICIDB iacente eerie 272 Belt Minder 103 Booster seats sssssss 132 Brakes scio er bes 195 antt lOCk etes 195 196 anti lock brake system ABS warnin
4. 7 Specification chart l brieants rms 303 Speed control sssssss 66 Stability system 198 Starting a flex fuel vehicle 192 Starting your vehicle 190 192 JUMP SUAFUB eere 242 Steering wheel TIE semne a 58 T Temperature control see Climate control 42 44 Tilt steering wheel 58 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS Tires Wheels and Loading 156 TICES cessent tet 138 139 232 alignment 5 148 CALS M 144 changing seriernes 232 235 237 checking the pressure 143 Inflating essere 140 label 4 issus tov tado uet 155 replacing sssi eerie 146 237 fota NE sereine setena 148 safety practices sse 147 sidewall information 150 snow tires and chains 166 SPATE WINE suse tita 233 235 terminology irori 139 tire grades iasessescseterimses 139 treadwear sssss 138 145 TOWING iiir tenentes 174 recreational towing 189 Trailer Brake Controller Integrated 184 trailer towing sssrinin 174 WEEKE cete ane tela 248 Traction control 197 Traction lok rear axle 203 Trailer Brake Controller Integrated 184 Transmission ss 205 brake shift interlock BSI 205 fluid checking and adding automatic 2 296 fluid refill capacities 303 lubr
5. 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies WRECKER TOWING If you need to have your vehicle towed contact a professional towing service or if you are a member of a roadside assistance program your roadside assistance service provider Ford recommends your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift or flatbed Do not tow with a slingbelt Ford Motor Company has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure If your vehicle is equipped with an air dam and must be towed from the front it is recommended that your vehicle be towed by wheel lift or flatbed equipment to prevent damage to the air dam If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly vehicle damage may occur Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow truck operators Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for proper hook up and towing procedures for your vehicle 248 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Emergency towing In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle without access to wheel dollies car hauling trailer or flatbed transport vehicle your vehicle regardless of transmission powertrain configuration can be flat towed all wheels on the ground under the following conditions e Vehicle is facing forward so that it is being towed in a forward direction e Place the transmission in N Neutral R
6. 3 Disconnect the electrical connector by squeezing the release tab and pushing the connector forward and then pulling it rearward 4 Remove the bulb assembly by turning it counterclockwise and pulling it straight out WARNING Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of children s reach Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do not touch the glass The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated Note If the bulb is accidentally touched it should be cleaned with alcohol before being used To install the new bulb follow the removal procedures in reverse order Replacing headlamps sealed beam 1 Make sure the headlamp switch is in the off position and open the hood 52 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus 2 Remove the four screws from the top and bottom front of the headlamp assembly and carefully remove the lamp bezel 3 Remove the four screws and the retaining ring 4 Disconnect the electrical connector from the lamp and remove the lamp To install the new lamp follow the removal procedures in reverse order Replacing front parking lamp turn signal bulbs 1 Make sure the headlamp control is in the off position 2 Remove the headlamp assembly refer to Replacing headlamp bulbs in this section Aerodynamic Sealed beam 3 Rotate the b
7. All vehicles Do not tow your vehicle with any wheels on the ground as vehicle or transmission damage may occur It is recommended to tow your vehicle with all four 4 wheels off the ground such as when using a car hauling trailer Otherwise no recreational towing is permitted In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle see Wrecker towing in the Roadside Emergencies chapter 189 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving STARTING Positions of the ignition 1 Accessory allows the electrical 4 accessories such as the radio to 3 operate while the engine is not running AB 2 Lock locks the automatic 2 transmission gearshift lever and allows key removal 7 3 Off shuts off the engine and all 1 accessories without locking the steering wheel 4 On all electrical circuits operational Warning lights illuminated Key position when driving 5 Start cranks the engine Release the key as soon as the engine starts Preparing to start your vehicle Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system This system meets all Canadian Interference Causing Equipment standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio noise When starting a fuel injected engine don t press the accelerator before or during starting Only use the accelerator when you have difficulty starting the engine For more information on starting t
8. During Traction Control operation the traction control active light will f flash and the engine will not rev up when you push further on the accelerator This is normal system behavior and should be no reason for concern WARNING Aggressive driving in any road conditions can cause you to lose control of your vehicle increasing the risk of severe personal injury or property damage The occurrence of a Traction Control event is an indication that at least some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road this may lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death If you experience a severe road event SLOW DOWN The Traction Control switch located on the center console has an indicator light that illuminates steadily in the instrument cluster when the system is off The Traction Control system will automatically turn on every time the ignition is turned off and on The Traction Control system should normally be left on If you should become stuck in snow or ice or on a very slippery road surface try switching the Traction Control system off This may allow excess wheel spin to dig the vehicle out and enable a successful rocking maneuver Remember to switch the Traction Control system back on once the vehicle is no longer stuck 197 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving If a system fault is detecte
9. Infant and or toddler seats Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the child When installing a child safety seat e Review and follow the information presented in the Airbag supplemental restraint system SRS section in this chapter Carefully follow all of the manufacturer s instructions included with the safety seat you put in your vehicle If you do not install and use the safety seat properly the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the vehicle seat all the way back Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position whenever possible If all children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating position properly restrain the largest child in the front seat Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder belts Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position whenever possible If all children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating position properly restrain the largest child in the front seat 121 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints When installing a c
10. 140 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found on the tire The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door Failure to follow the tire pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and adversely affect the way your vehicle handles Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer s maximum permissible pressure and or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire This pressure is normally higher than the manufacturer s recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label When weather temperature changes occur tire inflation pressures also change A 10 F 6 C temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop of 1 psi 7 kPa in inflation pressure Check your tire pressures frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label To check t
11. 6OZN SSM uoneogroeds pJo p Jo squeurombod ayy Joour ATUO poou ro urSuy amp rojeputur jou ST IO 1030ur puo q oreujus IO IM YJU S JO esp e ponge4 INOA ur peddmbo Aqreurstio od j 3uepooo Y PPV Ajnq 1edng 5 10 807 ae suo res8 0 GG your 92 pue Your BGT Yuey Tony Ajnq Jedng y s CIO ISD ydaoxa aseqiaoym suoyes oor Your 94 T U 1 ony Aqjng szedng 7y 310 ISD dooxo aseqiaoym suoyes Q or Your SgT U 1 ony Ajng I dng 4 CIO ISD ydooxo oseqpooum suomea oop yout ggT AULI ona suosem pue SULA CIFSSD w8ue pepue1xo suo re8 ae pue je ngoJ I e Tu Pony uor vorgroods ploy Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus 2009 Econoline eco 308 Maintenance and Specifications 10 80Z suoqre8 0 99 Yury pong Teuondo epo my JO uro33oq Aopeq urur pp 0j WUT 9 YIU 9 6 03 qour p T 03 serxe Ivor eue MA IoyeM Ul peSJourqus Useq seu o xe val oy IWY Aue poSueuo oq p nous 3ueoriqny o xe ou 19384 ur pes8qioeurqns useq seu Apquioasse o xe oY IO poJmbo st 92IAIoS pojoedsns st yea e ssop un poSueuo IO poxo9uo oq 03 peau JOU op sjueoriqn 9saug fly 10 pejeormqny pooprsuoo st 3t jueotiqny AXL Tear orjouju s e YM por ST 9 xe Tad SAPTA MOL JT V 81IOSINALSM uoreogroeds pio p Surjeeur quopeAmbo 10 TX J9gtpojy UOMA eAnrppv JO TUI gzz zo 8 se1mboz 09W AXL dijs pojrung eue q ogeurep uoissrursueJ osneo ABUT pny popuoeurulooo4 oq Ue 19470 pimp Aue Jo 2s TeAJ9qUI 99IAI9S 1291100 OY VUTULIOJI
12. Administrator 1200 New Jersey Avenue Southeast Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS CANADA ONLY If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform Transport Canada using their toll free number 1 800 333 0510 257 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning WASHING THE EXTERIOR Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo such as Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A which is available from your authorized dealer e Never use strong household detergents or soap such as dish washing or laundry liquid These products can discolor and spot painted surfaces e Never wash a vehicle that is hot to the touch or during exposure to strong direct sunlight e Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for best results e Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to eliminate water spotting e t is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the winter months as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause damage to the vehicle e mmediately remove items such as gasoline diesel fuel bird droppings and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle s paintwork and trim over time Use Bug and
13. SPR T XXXXX XXXXX XXX XX X XX X XXX XXXX XXXXXXX XX XX GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle including all options equipment passengers and cargo The GVWR is shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The GVW must never exceed the GVWR 170 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading WARNING Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle handling or performance engine transmission and or structural damage serious damage to the vehicle loss of control and personal injury Gew GCW Gross Combined Weight is the weight of the loaded vehicle GVW plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer GCWR Gross Combined Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer including all cargo and passengers that the vehicle can handle without risking damage Important The towing vehicle s braking system is rated for operation at GVWR not at GCWR Separate functional brakes should be used for safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle The GCW must never exceed the GCWR Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight is the hi
14. indicators or wear bars which look like narrow strips of smooth rubber across the tread will appear on the tire when the tread is worn Ti down to 1 16th of an inch 2 mm N 28 When the tire tread wears down to the same height as these wear bars the tire is worn out and must be replaced Damage Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage such as bulges in the tread or sidewalls cracks in the tread groove and separation in the tread or sidewall If damage is observed or suspected have the tire inspected by a tire professional Tires can be damaged during off road use so inspection after off road use is also recommended WARNING Age Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as weather storage conditions and conditions of use load speed inflation pressure etc the tires experience throughout their lives In general tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread wear However heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be replaced more frequently You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or after six years due to aging even if it has not been used 145 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading U S DOT Tire Identification Number TIN Both U S and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to pl
15. start up remains on or flashes the ABS may be disabled and may need to be serviced Even when the ABS is disabled normal braking is still effective If your BRAKE warning lamp illuminates with the parking brake B HAKE released have your brake system serviced immediately by an authorized dealer Parking brake To set the parking brake 1 press the parking brake pedal down until the pedal stops To release pull the lever 2 WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the gearshift is securely latched in P Park The BRAKE warning lamp will illuminate and will remain illuminated until the parking brake is released B RAKE 196 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving The parking brake is not recommended to stop a moving vehicle However if the normal brakes fail the parking brake can be used to stop your vehicle in an emergency Since the parking brake applies only the rear brakes the vehicle s stopping distance will increase greatly and the handling of your vehicle will be adversely affected TRACTION CONTROL IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a Traction Control system This system helps you maintain the stability and steerability of your vehicle especially on slippery road surfaces such as snow or ice covered roads and gravel roads The system will allow your vehicle to make better use of available traction in these conditions
16. FULL COLD level For all other vehicles which have a coolant degas system with a pressurized cap or if it is necessary to remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with an overflow system follow these steps to add engine coolant WARNING To reduce the risk of personal injury make sure the engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap The cooling system is under pressure steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly Add the proper mixture of coolant and water to the cooling system by following these steps 1 Before you begin turn the engine off and let it cool 2 When the engine is cool wrap a thick cloth around the coolant pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir a translucent plastic bottle Slowly turn cap counterclockwise left until pressure begins to release 3 Step back while the pressure releases 4 When you are sure that all the pressure has been released use the cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap 5 Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture to within the COLD FILL RANGE or the FULL COLD level on the reservoir If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system fill the radiator until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full 6 Replace the cap Turn until tightly installed Cap must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss After any coolant has been adde
17. If a specific category is selected Jazz Rock News etc press SEEK SEEK B gt to seek to the previous next channel in the selected category Press and hold lt SEEK SEEK P to fast seek through the previous next channels In TEXT MODE press SEEK SEEK to view the previous additional display text In CATEGORY MODE press lt SEEK SEEK b to select a category Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 6 9 11 OK Play Pause This control is operational in CD MP3 mode When a CD MP3 is playing press to pause or play the current CD MP3 The CD MP3 status will display in the radio display OK Use in various menu selections 7 SHUFFLE In CD MP3 mode press SHUFFLE to engage shuffle mode SHUFFLE ON will appear in the display If you wish to engage shuffle mode right away press SEEK to begin random play Otherwise random play will begin when the current track is finished playing CD SHUF will appear in the display To disengage press SHUFFLE again SHUFFLE OFF will appear in the display Note In track mode all tracks on the current disc will shuffle in random order In MP3 folder mode the system will randomly play all tracks within the current folder 8 FOLDER gt In folder mode zm press FOLDER gt to access next folder on MP3 discs if available 9 lt q FOLDER In folder mode es press id FOLDER
18. If there are less than six strong stations the system will store the last one in the remaining presets RBDS Available only in FM mode This feature allows you to search RBDS equipped stations for a certain category of music format CLASSIC COUNTRY INFORM JAZZ RB ROCK etc To activate press MENU repeatedly until RBDS ON OFF appears in the display Use amp IV to toggle RBDS ON OFF When RBDS is OFF you will not be able to search for RBDS equipped stations or view the station name or type To search for specific RBDS music categories When the desired category appears in the display press A IV to find the desired type then press and release SEEK SEEK gt or press and hold SCAN to begin the search 29 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems To view the station name or type When the desired category appears in the display press TEXT SCAN to toggle between displaying the station type COUNTRY ROCK etc or the station name WYCD WXYZ etc BASS Press MENU to reach the bass setting Use IV to adjust TREB Treble Press MENU to reach the treble setting Use A IV to adjust BAL Balance Press MENU to reach the balance setting Use A IV to adjust the audio between the left L and right R speakers FADE Press MENU to reach the fade setting Use A IV to adjust the audio between the back B and front F speakers ALL SEATS Occupancy mode Availabl
19. Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights To adjust the headlamps 1 Park your vehicle on a level surface about 25 feet 7 6 meters away from a vertical plain surface 3 Check your headlamp alignment at night or in a dark area so that you can see the headlamp beam pattern e 1 8 feet 2 4 meters e 2 Center height of lamp to ground e 3 25 feet 7 6 meters e 4 Horizontal reference line e 5 Center of headlamps e 6 Center line of the vehicle 2 The center of the headlamp is marked either on the lens a circle Or cross marker or on the bulb shield internal to the lamp mark or feature Measure the height from the center of your headlamp to the ground 2 and mark an 8 foot 2 4 meter long horizontal line on the wall or screen 1 at this height masking tape works well 3 Turn on the low beam headlamps and open the hood 4 Locate the high intensity area of the beam pattern and place the top edge of the intensity zone even with the horizontal reference line 4 If the top edge of the high intensity area is not even with the horizontal line follow the next step to adjust it 5 Locate the vertical adjuster 1 for each headlamp Adjust the aim by turning the adjuster control either clockwise to adjust up or counterclockwise to adjust down 6 In addition to the horizontal line marked in step 2 a pair of vertical lines 5 must be marked at the center line of the headlamps on the w
20. Position the seat to the floor mount 2 Pull the seat latch handle downward to lock the seat in position 3 Make sure the safety belt is not twisted then insert the safety belt tongue into detachable anchor until you hear a click and feel the latch engage Rear bench seat To remove the seats 1 Disengage the lap shoulder belt from the seat by inserting a key or small screwdriver into the slot in the detachable anchor and lifting upward 2nd row passenger side only 95 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 2 Find the clips attached near the ends of the lap shoulder belts 3 Clip the end of the belt to the stationary portion of the shoulder belt coming out of the trim panel The end of the shoulder belt must be clipped in order to keep it from striking anything during vehicle operation 96 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Peru 4 With assistance pull the LH RH seat latch release straps 1 located behind the latch mechanisms to release the latch from the rear strikers 5 Lift the rear end of seat upward and rearward by pushing on the seatback 2 and lifting the seat cushion 3 to disengage the front seat hook and the rear seat latch from the striker 6 With assistance remove the seat assembly e To remove the 3rd 4th and 5th row seats if equip
21. Trailer Weights 3 Maximum Maximum pm d Loaded frontal ERGO Tatio Trailer Weight trailer ft Ib kg m E 250 Extended RV Van 9000 GVWR 13000 sab 9m 5896 jou SM 13000 soe ie L Seer E 350 Regular RV Van 9500 GVWR E 350 Extended RV Van 9500 GVWR E 350 Regular Wagon 11 12 Passenger 8800 GVWR 13000 5897 ee ee 13000 esp ee E 176 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading GCWR Gross Combined Weight Rating Trailer Weights 3 Maximum Maximum pm d Loaded frontal PRG iue Trailer Weight trailer ft lb kg m E 350 Regular Wagon 11 12 Passenger 8700 GVWR 15000 3 5m am 800 6856 mes 18500 Q5 pe ea E 350 Extended Wagon 11 Passenger 9300 GVWR 13000 pu ee p 13000 oup pe E 350 Extended Wagon 11 Passenger 9500 GVWR 15000 ED Med d ao 18500 pop ue E 350 Extended Wagon 14 15 Passenger 9100 GVWR 13000 or ee p eee 13000 pur ieee E 350 Extended Wagon 14 15 Passenger 9300 GVWR 15000 6804 oe CM ae 18500 i eas asl Ncc 177 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading GCWR Gross Combined Weight Rating Trailer Weights Rear Maximum Maximum xe Loaded frontal PRG eat Trailer Weight trailer ft lb kg m E 350 Cutaway 138 wheelbase single rear wheel 9600 GVWR 13000 Bor ee Mene ee 18500 Bu
22. e f a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning clean the entire area immediately but do not oversaturate or the ring will set e Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners which can stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of the seat materials WARNING Do not use cleaning solvents bleach or dye on the vehicle s seatbelts as these actions may weaken the belt webbing LEATHER SEATS IF EQUIPPED Your leather seating surfaces have a clear protective coating over the leather e To clean use a soft cloth with Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner ZC 11 A In Canada use Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner CXC 93 Dry the area with a soft cloth e To help maintain its resiliency and color use the Motorcraft Deluxe Leather Care Kit ZC 11 D available from your authorized dealer In Canada use Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner CXC 93 or an equivalent high quality leather care product e Do not use household cleaning products alcohol solutions solvents or cleaners intended for rubber vinyl and plastics or oil petroleum based leather conditioners These products may cause premature wearing of the clear protective coating Note In some instances color or dye transfer can occur when wet clothing comes in contact with leather upholstery If this occurs the leather should be cleaned immediately to avoid permanent staining UNDERBODY Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequ
23. engine oil level dipstick 6 Wipe the dipstick clean Insert the dipstick fully then remove it again e If the oil level is between the lower and upper holes or between the MIN and MAX marks depending on application the oil level is acceptable DO NOT ADD OIL If the oil level is below the lower hole or the MIN mark add enough oil to raise the level within the lower and upper holes or within the MIN MAX range Oil levels above the upper hole or the MAX mark may cause engine damage Some oil must be removed from the engine by an authorized dealer 7 Put the dipstick back in and ensure it is fully seated Adding engine oil 1 Check the engine oil For instructions refer to Checking the engine oil in this chapter 2 If the engine oil level is not within the normal range add only certified engine oil of the recommended viscosity Remove the engine oil filler cap and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening 270 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 3 Recheck the engine oil level Make sure the oil level is not above the normal operating range on the engine oil level dipstick 4 Install the dipstick and ensure it is fully seated 5 Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise 1 4 of a turn until three clicks are heard or until the cap is fully seated To avoid possible oil loss DO NOT operate the vehic
24. fus Cleaning PLASTIC NON PAINTED EXTERIOR PARTS Use only approved products to clean plastic parts These products are available from your authorized dealer e For routine cleaning use Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A e f tar or grease spots are present use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 e For plastic headlamp lenses use Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner ZC 23 WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES The windshield rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be cleaned regularly If the wipers do not wipe properly substances on the vehicle s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause These may include hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes water repellent coatings tree sap or other organic contamination these contaminants may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades and streaking and smearing of the windshield To clean these items follow these tips e The windshield rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with a non abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner ZC 23 available from your authorized dealer e The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl rubbing alcohol or Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate ZC 32 A available from your authorized dealer This washer fluid contains special solution in addition to alcohol which helps to remove the hot wax deposited on the wiper blade and windshield from automated car wash facilities Be su
25. operate while the ignition is in the on position whether the engine is running or not It is however recommended that the engine remain running to maintain battery charge when using the Upfitter switches for extended duration or higher current draws This is even more important for vehicles with diesel engines since the glow plugs are also draining battery power when the ignition key is in the on position When switched on by the operator they provide 10 amps 15 amps or 30 amps of electrical battery power for a variety of personal or commercial uses If your vehicle is equipped with this option a relay fuse kit will be included This kit contains the required fuses and relays that need to be installed into the Power Distribution Box located under the hood Refer to the instruction sketch included in the kit and Fuses and Relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter See your authorized dealer for service There will also be one power lead for each switch found as a blunt cut and sealed wire located in the underhood cowl shield above the engine block PCM 68 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls They are coded as follows AUX 1 CACO5 AUX 2 CAC06 Green with Brown Trace AUX 3 CACOT Violet with Green Trace AUX 4 CACOS More detailed information about the Upfitter switches can be found in the Upfitter Switches bulletin found at www fleet ford com truckbbas non htm1 Q117
26. safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that are designed to be used as a pair 1 Use the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm 2 Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder 3 Never use a single belt for more than one person WARNING When possible all children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position WARNING Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather they could burn a small child Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them WARNING Front and rear seat occupants including pregnant women should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an accident Combination lap and shoulder belts 1 Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from until you hear a snap and feel it latch Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle 99 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints e Front and rear seats 2 To unfasten push the release button and remove the tongue from the buckle se St e Front and rear seats All safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts All of the passenger combination lap and shoulder belts have three types of locking modes described be
27. specifications The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal regulations 183 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading WARNING Do not connect a trailer s hydraulic brake system directly to your vehicle s brake system Your vehicle may not have enough braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the GVWR not GCWR Integrated trailer brake controller if equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a fully integrated electronic Trailer Brake Controller TBC When used properly the TBC helps ensure smooth and effective trailer braking by powering the trailers electric brakes with a proportional output based on the towing vehicle s brake pressure WARNING The Ford TBC has only been verified to be compatible with trailers having electric actuated drum brakes one to four axles and not hydraulic surge or electric over hydraulic types It is the responsibility of the customer to ensure that the trailer brakes are adjusted appropriately functioning normally and all electric connections are properly made The TBC user interface consists of the following 1 GAIN adjustment buttons Pressing these buttons will adjust the TBC s power output to the trailer brakes in 0 5 increments The GAIN setting can be increased to a maximum of 10 0 or decreased to a minimum of 0 no trailer braki
28. straps of the rear bench seats Doing so could cause the release straps to inadvertently unlatch the rear bench seat If not latched the seat may cause serious injury during a sudden stop SAFETY RESTRAINTS Safety restraints precautions WARNING Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips WARNING To reduce the risk of injury make sure children sit in the back seat where they can be properly restrained WARNING Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision WARNING All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always properly wear their safety belts even when an airbag supplemental restraint system SRS is provided WARNING It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly 98 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a safety belt WARNING Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific
29. the child safety seat may not be retained properly in the event of a collision 3 Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions If the safety seat is not anchored properly the risk of a child being injured in a collision greatly increases 130 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Second Third Fourth and Fifth row bench seats For the center position of a three passenger bench seat the e i L L Y tether strap can be attached directly to the tether bracket provided i i i under the back edge of the seat L L L ds cushion For the outboard positions the tether strap can be attached to the slot in the side of the seat pedestal Although tether slots are provided on the seat pedestals of the four passenger bench seat use of child seats is not recommended for these seating position locations 1 For any three passenger bench seat place the child safety seat on the left hand outboard position the center position or the right hand outboard position as desired 2 Route the child safety tether strap over the back of the bench seat 3 Clip the center tether strap hook to the tether bracket mounted P AT under rear rail of seat cushion frame Clip the outboard tether P strap hooks to the tether bracket slot provided on the left side of each seat pedestal The sl
30. with SIRIUS While in Satellite Radio mode you can view this number on the radio display by pressing AUX and Preset 1 control simultaneously 39 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Radio Display Action Required ACQUIRING Radio requires more No action required than two seconds to This message should produce audio for the disappear shortly selected channel SAT FAULT Internal module or If this message does system failure not clear within a short present period of time or with an ignition key cycle your receiver may have a fault See your authorized dealer for service INVALID CHNL Channel no longer This previously available available channel is no longer available Tune to another channel If the channel was one of your presets you may choose another channel for that preset button UNSUBSCRIBED Subscription not Contact SIRIUS at available for this 1 888 539 7474 to channel subscribe to the channel or tune to another channel NO TEXT Artist information not Artist information not available available at this time on this channel The system is working properly 40 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Radio Display Action Required not available NO TEXT NO TEXT NO SIGNAL Category information not available Loss of signal from the SIRIUS satellite or SIRIUS tower to the vehicle antenna U
31. 8 U S DOT Tire Identification Number TIN This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built For example the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997 After 2000 the numbers go to four digits For example 2501 means the 25th week of 2001 The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall 9 M S or M S Mud and Snow or AT All Terrain or AS All Season 10 Tire Ply Composition and Material Used Indicates the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and the sidewall which include steel nylon polyester and others 11 Maximum Load Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire Refer to the Safety Compliance Certification Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle 152 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading 12 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades e Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparativ
32. 99 kg each and the golf bags weigh approximately 30 Ib 18 5 kg each The calculation would be 1400 5 x 220 5 x 30 1400 1100 150 150 Ib Yes you have enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and your golf bags In metric units the calculation would be 635 kg 5 x 99 kg b x 13 5 kg 635 495 67 5 72 5 kg 172 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading e A final example for your vehicle with 1 400 Ib 635 kg of cargo and luggage capacity You and one of your friends decide to pick up cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio you have been planning for the past 2 years Measuring the inside of the vehicle with the rear seat folded down you have room for 12 100 Ib 45 kg bags of cement Do you have enough load capacity to transport the cement to your home If you and your friend each weigh 220 Ib 99 kg the calculation would be 1400 2 x 220 12 x 100 1400 440 1200 240 Ib No you do not have enough cargo capacity to carry that much weight In metric units the calculation would be 635 kg 2 x 99 kg 12 x 45 kg 635 198 540 103 kg You will need to reduce the load weight by at least 240 Ib 104 kg If you remove 3 100 Ib 45 kg cement bags then the load calculation would be 1400 2 x 220 9 x 100 1400 440 900 60 Ib Now you have the load capacity to transport the
33. A IV to cycle through the following options e CATEGORY Press OK to enter category mode Press A IV to scroll through the list of available SIRIUS channel Categories Pop Rock News etc Press OK when the desired category appears in the display After a category is selected press SEEK to search for that specific category of channels only i e ROCK You may also select CATEGORY ALL to seek all available SIRIUS categories and channels e SAVE SONG Press OK to save the currently playing song in the system s memory If you try to save something other than a song CANT SAVE will appear in the display When the chosen song is playing on any satellite radio channel the system will alert you with an audible prompt Press OK while SONG ALERT is in the display and the system will take you to the channel playing the desired song You can save up to 20 songs If you attempt to save a song when the system is full the display will read REPLACE SONG Press OK to access the saved songs and press A IV to cycle through the saved songs When the song appears in the display that you would like to replace press OK SONG REPLACED will appear in the display e DELETE SONG Press OK to delete a song from the system s memory Press A IV to cycle through the saved songs When the song appears in the display that you would like to delete press OK The song will appear in the display for confirmation Press OK again 28 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1
34. Booster seats position a child so that vehicle lap shoulder safety belts fit better They lift the child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips and the knees bend comfortably at the edge of the cushion while minimizing slouching Booster seats may also make the shoulder belt fit better and more comfortably Try to keep the belt near the middle of the shoulder and across the center of the chest Moving the child closer a few centimeters or inches to the center of the vehicle but remaining in the same seating position may help provide a good shoulder belt fit When children should use booster seats Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and lap shoulder belt to fit properly Generally this is when they reach a height of at least 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall around age eight to age twelve and between 40 Ib 18 kg and 80 Ib 36 kg or upward to 100 Ib 45 kg if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer Many state and provincial laws require that children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight a height of 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall or 80 Ib 36 kg 132 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these questions when seated without a booster seat e Can the child sit all the way back again
35. CHARACTERISTICS How your vehicle differs from other vehicles S some other vehicles in a few n be As a result of the above dimensional differences SUV s and trucks often will have a higher center of gravity and a greater difference in center of 8 unloaded condition UV and trucks can differ from oticeable ways Your vehicle may Higher to allow higher load carrying capacity and to allow it to travel over rough terrain without getting hung up or damaging underbody components Shorter to give it the capability to approach inclines and drive over the crest of a hill without getting hung up or damaging underbody components All other things held equal a shorter wheelbase may make your vehicle quicker to respond to steering inputs than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase Narrower to provide greater maneuverability in tight spaces particularly in off road use ravity between the loaded and These differences that make your V handle differently than an ordinary p ehicle so versatile also make it assenger car 137 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires The Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example e Treadwear 200
36. DRIVING THROUGH WATER If driving through deep or standing water is unavoidable proceed very slowly especially when the depth is not known Never drive through o water that is higher than the bottom A of the wheel rims for cars or the bottom of the hubs for trucks When driving through water traction or brake capability may be limited Also water may enter your engine s air intake and severely damage your engine or your vehicle may stall Driving through deep water where the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow water into the transmission and cause internal transmission damage Once through the water always dry the brakes by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes 220 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE Getting roadside assistance To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern Ford Motor Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program This program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty The service is available e 24 hours seven days a week e for the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card included in your Owner Guide portfolio Roadside assistance will cover e a flat tire change with a good spare except vehicles that have been supplied with a tire inflation kit e battery jump start e loc
37. E 450 vehicles with the Hydro Boost Brake System do not press the brake pedal after the engine has been turned off Pressing the brake pedal after the engine has been turned off will give a false power steering fluid level reading 5 Recheck the fluid level on the dipstick Do not add fluid if the level is between the arrows in the FULL COLD range 6 If the fluid is low add fluid in small amounts continuously checking the level until it reaches the FULL COLD range Be sure to put the dipstick back in the reservoir Refer to Maintenance product specifications amd capacities in this chapter for the proper fluid type BRAKE FLUID e E 150 E 350 Single Rear Wheel qop MXA MIN A e E 350 E 450 Dual Rear Wheel 295 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications The fluid level will drop slowly as the brakes wear and will rise when the brake components are replaced Fluid levels between the MIN and MAX lines are within the normal operating range there is no need to add fluid If the fluid levels are outside of the normal operating range the performance of the system could be compromised seek service from your authorized dealer immediately DRIVELINE UNIVERSAL JOINT AND SLIP YOKE Your vehicle may be equipped with universal joints that require lubrication Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for maintenance intervals If the original u
38. Maintenance and Specifications When fail safe mode is activated You have limited engine power when in the fail safe mode so drive the vehicle with caution The vehicle will not be able to maintain high speed operation and the engine will run rough Remember that the engine is capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine damage therefore 1 Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine 2 Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to an authorized dealer 3 If this is not possible wait a short period for the engine to cool 4 Check the coolant level and replenish if low WARNING Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot 5 Re start the engine and take your vehicle to an authorized dealer Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem increases the chance of engine damage Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible FUEL FILTER Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel tank Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS gj Important safety precautions WARNING Do not overfill the fuel tank The pressure in an overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire WARNING The fuel system may be under pressure If the fuel filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound wait until it stops before comple
39. Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING If the OFF light is illuminated when the passenger airbag switch is in the ON position and the ignition switch is in ON have the passenger airbag switch serviced at an authorized dealer immediately The passenger side airbag should always be ON the airbag OFF light should not be illuminated unless the passenger is a person who meets the requirements stated either in Category 1 2 or 3 of the NHTSA Transport Canada deactivation criteria which follows WARNING The safety belts for the driver and right front passenger seating positions have been specifically designed to function together with the airbags in certain types of crashes When you turn OFF your airbag you not only lose the protection of the airbag you also may reduce the effectiveness of your safety belt system which was designed to work with the airbag If you are not a person who meets the requirements stated in the NHTSA Transport Canada deactivation criteria turning OFF the airbag can increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision WARNING If your vehicle has rear seats always transport children who are 12 and younger in the rear seat Always use safety belts and child restraints properly DO NOT place a child in a rear facing infant seat in the front seat unless your vehicle is equipped with an airbag ON OFF switch and the passenger airbag is turned OFF This is because the back of the infant sea
40. The interior lamps illuminate when the remote entry system is used to unlock the door s or sound the personal alarm The illuminated entry system will turn off the interior lights if e the ignition switch is turned to the on or accessory position or e the remote transmitter lock control is pressed or e after 25 seconds of illumination The dome lamp control if equipped must not be set to the off position for the illuminated entry system to operate The inside lights will not turn off if e they have been turned on with the dimmer control or e any door is open SECURILOCK PASSIVE ANTI THEFT SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED SecuriLock passive anti theft system is an engine immobilization system This system is designed to help prevent the engine from being started unless a coded key programmed to your vehicle is used The use of the wrong type of coded key may lead to a no start condition 86 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Your vehicle comes with two coded keys additional coded keys may be purchased from your authorized dealer The authorized dealer can program your spare keys to your vehicle or you can program the keys yourself Refer to Programming spare keys for instructions on how to program the coded key Note The SecuriLock passive anti theft system is not compatible with non Ford aftermarket remote start systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
41. This allows you to use the full functionality of the message center after you acknowledge the warning by pressing the SELECT RESET stem and clearing the warning message Warning messages that have been reset are divided into two categories e They will reappear on the display 10 minutes from the reset e They will not reappear until an ignition off on cycle has been completed This acts as a reminder that these warning conditions still exist within the vehicle 74 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Warning display Park brake engaged Warning returns after 10 minutes if Check brake system condition still exists Service RSC now XXX miles to E fuellevellow Warning returns after the ignition key is turned from off to on equipped Trailer brake module fault if Trailer disconnected if equipped equipped Warning can be cleared by pressing the SELECT RESET button Warning can reappear if the condition is still present Warning will reappear on the Tire sensor fault if equipped next ignition key cycle if the condition only Drain water separator diesel engine only Oil life change soon Oil change required PARK BRAKE ENGAGED Displayed when the parking brake is applied or not fully released CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM Displayed when a fault has been detected by the ABS module SERVICE RSC NOW Displayed when the RSC system is not operating properly If the w
42. XX XXXX XXXX XXXXXXXXKXXXXXX includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight including cargo and optional equipment When towing trailer tongue load or king pin weight is also part of cargo weight GAW Gross Axle Weight is the total weight placed on each axle front and rear including vehicle curb weight and all payload 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus 169 Tires Wheels and Loading GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle front or rear These numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The total load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR Note For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your authorized dealer GVW Gross Vehicle Weight is the Vehicle Curb Weight cargo passengers MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO DATE 12 01 GVWR XXXXLB XXXXKG FRONT GAWR XXXXLB XXXXKG FRONT GAWR XXXXLB XXXXKG WITH XXXXXXXXXXX TIRES WITH XXXXXXXXXXX TIRES XXXX XX RIMS XXXX XX RIMS AT XXXXkPa XX PSICOLD AT XXXXkPa XX PSI COLD THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTUER SHOWN ABOVE VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX TYPE XXX EXT PNT XX RC XX DSO XXXXX WB INTTR TP PS R AXLE TR
43. adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in motion Automatic dimming interior rear view mirror if equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with an interior rear view mirror that has an auto dimming function The electronic day night mirror will change from the normal high reflective state to the non glare S 8 darkened state when bright lights glare reach the mirror When the mirror detects bright light from behind the vehicle it will automatically adjust darken to minimize glare 63 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls The mirror will automatically return to the normal state whenever the vehicle is placed in R Reverse to ensure a bright clear view when backing up Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the interior rear view mirror since this may impair proper mirror performance Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh abrasives fuel or other petroleum based cleaning products Note If equipped with a reverse camera system a video image will display in the mirror or the Navigation system display if equipped when the vehicle is put in R Reverse As you shift into any other gear from R Reverse the image will remain for a few seconds and then turn off Refer to Reverse camera system in the Driving chapter EXTERIOR MIRRORS Power side view mirrors if equipped To adjust your mirrors 1 Rotate the control clockwise to adj
44. and First 1 on very steep hills Do not apply your brakes continuously as they may overheat and become less effective Servicing after towing If you tow a trailer for long distances your vehicle will require more frequent service intervals Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for more information Trailer towing tips e Practice turning stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination When turning make wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles e Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached The trailer tongue weight should be 10 1596 of the loaded trailer weight If you will be towing a trailer frequently in hot weather hilly conditions at GCWR or any combination of these factors consider refilling your rear axle with synthetic gear lube if not already so equipped Refer to the Maintenance and specifications chapter for the lubricant specification Remember that regardless of the rear axle Iube used do not tow a trailer for the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km of a new vehicle and that the first 500 miles 800 km of towing be done at no faster than 70 mph 113 km h with no full throttle starts 188 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading e Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles 800 km after changing the rear axle lube e After you have traveled 50 miles 80
45. and then go out If not successful the new coded key s will not start the vehicle s engine and the theft indicator will flash on and off and you may repeat Steps 1 through 5 If failure repeats bring your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the new spare key s programmed 89 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints SEATING WARNING Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the seat s safety belt resulting in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision WARNING Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to reduce the risk of injury in a collision or sudden stop WARNING Before returning the seatback to its original position make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback After returning the seatback to its original position pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched An unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision Non adjustable head restraints Your vehicle is equipped with front row outboard non adjustable head restraints WARNING To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash the driver and passenger occupants should not sit in and or operate the vehicle until the seatback is placed in its proper position The driver should never adjust the seatback while the vehicle is in motion The non adjustable head restraints consist of a trimmed foam
46. apply grease to lugnut stud holes or wheel to brake surfaces JUMP STARTING YOUR VEHICLE The following procedure is for vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine if your vehicle is equipped with a diesel engine refer to the 6 0 and 6 4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner s Guide Supplement for the proper jump starting procedure WARNING The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames sparks or lit cigarettes An explosion could result in injury or vehicle damage WARNING Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin eyes and clothing if contacted Do not attempt to push start your automatic transmission vehicle Automatic transmissions do not have push start capability Attempting to push start a vehicle with an automatic transmission may cause transmission damage 242 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Preparing your vehicle When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed the automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy As a result the transmission may have firm and or soft shifts This operation is considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the transmission Over time the adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation 1 Use only a 12 volt supply to start your vehicle 2 Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could damage the vehicle
47. assembly for inspection Do not attempt to add air to tires or replace tires or wheels without first taking precautions to protect persons and property 143 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading WARNING Stay out of the trajectory 1 as indicated in the illustration TIRE CARE Inspecting your tires Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and remove objects such as stones nails or glass that may be wedged in the tread grooves Check for holes or cuts that may permit air leakage from the tire and make necessary repairs Also inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking cuts bruises and other signs of damage or excessive wear If internal damage to the tire is suspected have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced For your safety tires that are damaged or show signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely to blow out or fail 144 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear abnormally Inspect all your tires including the spare frequently and replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist Tire wear When the tread is worn down to 1 16th of an inch 2 mm tires must be replaced to help prevent your vehicle from skidding and hydroplaning Built in treadwear
48. been checked at the recommended interval the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty If the reservoir is low or empty add engine coolant to the reservoir Refer to Adding engine coolant in this chapter Note Automotive fluids are not interchangeable do not use engine coolant antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified function and vehicle location Adding engine coolant When adding coolant make sure it is a 50 50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water When the engine is cool add the mixture to the coolant reservoir until the appropriate fill level is obtained 276 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications WARNING Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you badly Also you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts WARNING Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid container If sprayed on the windshield engine coolant could make it difficult to see through the windshield e Add Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSS M97B51 A1 Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter Note Use of Motorcraft Cooling System Stop Leak Pellets or an equivalent product meeting Ford specification WSS M99B37 B6 may darken the color of Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolan
49. bottom pan Refer to scheduled maintenance information for service intervals for automatic transmission fluid and transmission filter For transmission filter maintenance see your authorized dealer AIR FILTER Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for changing the air filter element When changing the air filter element use only the Motorcraft air filter element listed Refer to Motorcraft part numbers in this chapter WARNING To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and or personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running 300 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Changing the air filter element 1 Disconnect the fresh air inlet tube from the radiator support 2 Open the clamp that secures the two halves of the air filter housing together 3 Carefully separate the two halves of the air filter housing 4 Remove the air filter element from the housing 5 Install a new air filter element Be careful not to crimp the filter element edges between the air filter housing This could cause filter damage and allow unfiltered air to enter the engine if not properly seated 6 Replace the two halves of the air filter housing and secure the clamp 7 Connect the fresh air inlet tube to the r
50. child has a medical condition that according to the child s physician makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so that the driver can monitor the child s condition 3 Medical condition A passenger has a medical condition that according to his or her physician e poses a special risk for the passenger if the airbag deploys and e makes the potential harm from the passenger airbag deployment greater than the potential harm from turning OFF the airbag and experiencing a crash without the protection offered by the airbag 116 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING This vehicle has special energy management safety belts for the driver and right front passenger These particular belts are specifically designed to work with airbags to help reduce the risk of injury in a collision The energy management safety belt is designed to give or release additional belt webbing in some accidents to reduce concentration of force on an occupant s chest and reduce the risk of certain bone fractures and injuries to underlying organs In a crash if the airbag is turned OFF this energy management safety belt might permit the person wearing the belt to move forward enough to incur a serious or fatal injury The more severe the crash and the heavier the occupant the greater the risk is Be sure the airbag is turned ON for any person who does not qualify under the NHTSA deactiv
51. cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or COVers 259 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your wheel rims or covers Chemical strength cleaners or cleaning chemicals in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust and dirt could wear away the clearcoat finish over time Do not use hydrofluoric acid based or high caustic based wheel cleaners steel wool fuels or strong household detergent To remove tar and grease use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 available from your authorized dealer ENGINE Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt buildup keep the engine warmer than normal When washing Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine The high pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause damage Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the engine block or other engine components Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser ZC 20 on all parts that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean In Canada use Motorcraft Engine Shampoo CXC 66 A E eid Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning the engine Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running water in the running engine may cause internal damage 260 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA
52. death Using your vehicle as an ambulance If your light truck is equipped with the Ford Ambulance Preparation Package it may be utilized as an ambulance Ford urges ambulance manufacturers to follow the recommendations of the Ford Incomplete Vehicle Manual Ford Truck Body Builder s Layout Book and the Qualified Vehicle Modifiers QVM Guidelines as well as pertinent supplements For additional information please contact the Truck Body Builders Advisory Service at 1 877 840 4338 Use of your Ford light truck as an ambulance without the Ford Ambulance Preparation Package voids the Ford New Vehicle Limited Warranty and may void the Emissions Warranties In addition ambulance usage without the preparation package could cause high underbody temperatures overpressurized fuel and a risk of spraying fuel which could lead to fires If your vehicle is equipped with the Ford Ambulance Preparation Package it will be indicated on the Safety Compliance Certification Label The label is located on the driver s side door pillar or on the rear edge of the driver s door You can determine whether the ambulance manufacturer followed Ford s recommendations by directly contacting that manufacturer Ford Ambulance Preparation Package is only available on certain Diesel engine equipped vehicles Using your vehicle as a stationary power source PTO Refer to the Driving chapter for more information and guidelines for operating a veh
53. delivered has been lost or no longer functions the battery is not replaceable please contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible to obtain a replacement To verify that your TPMS reset tool is working press and release the button on the center of the TPMS tool The red light should illuminate and remain on for approximately five 5 seconds If the light does not illuminate the tool needs to be replaced TPMS reset tips e To reduce the chances of interference from another vehicle TPMS reset should be performed at least three feet one meter away from another Ford Motor Company vehicle undergoing the TPMS reset procedure at the same time e Do not wait more than two 2 minutes between resetting each tire sensor or the system will timeout and the entire procedure will have to be repeated on all four wheels e A double horn chirp indicates the need to repeat the procedure TPMS reset procedure It is recommended that you read the entire procedure before attempting Note To enter the reset mode Steps 1 6 MUST be completed within 60 seconds 1 Place the ignition in the off position and keep the key in the ignition 162 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading 2 Press and release the brake pedal 3 Cycle the ignition from off to on three 3 times ending in the on ec position DO NOT start the engine x 4 Press and hold the brake pedal for two 2 second
54. dipstick Power steering fluid reservoir Brake fluid reservoir Engine coolant reservoir Power distribution box 10 Battery 267 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID C Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low In very cold weather do not fill the reservoir completely Only use a washer fluid that meets Ford specification WSB M8B16 A2 Do not use any special washer fluid such as windshield water repellent type fluid or bug wash They may cause squeaking chatter noise streaking and smearing Refer to the Maintenance product specifications and capacities section in this chapter State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the use of methanol a common windshield washer antifreeze additive Washer fluids containing non methanol antifreeze agents should be used only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the vehicle s paint finish wiper blades or washer system WARNING If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40 F 5 C use washer fluid with antifreeze protection Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident Note Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir Washer fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system component
55. gasoline is added to make it unfit for beverage use The resulting ethanol blend is called denatured fuel ethanol meaning that it is denatured with 296 to 596 gasoline and is suitable for automotive use During the summer season fuel ethanol may contain a maximum of 8596 denatured ethanol Ed85 and 1596 unleaded gasoline The fuel ethanol has a higher octane rating than unleaded regular or premium gasoline and this allows the design of engines with greater efficiency and power Winter blends may contain up to 75 denatured ethanol Ed75 and up to 2596 unleaded gasoline to enhance cold engine starts Severely cold weather may require additional measures for reliable starting Refer to Starting in the Driving chapter Ethanol is more chemically active than gasoline It corrodes some metals and causes some plastic and rubber components to swell break down or become brittle and crack especially when mixed with gasoline Special materials and procedures have been developed for flexible fuel vehicles and the dispensers used by ethanol fuel providers WARNING Flexible fuel components and standard unleaded gasoline fuel components are not interchangeable If your vehicle is not serviced in accordance with flexible fuel vehicles procedures damage may occur and your warranty may be invalidated WARNING When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck Never smoke while refueling Fuel vapor is ex
56. in function from the SETUP MENU or put the vehicle in R Reverse 2 Press and hold the SELECT RESET stem to turn the park aid ON or OFF 72 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls 3 Press the SELECT RESET stem for the next SETUP MENU item or wait for more than four seconds to return to the INFO MENU Oil Life Reset and Start Value An oil change is required whenever indicated by the message center and according to the recommended maintenance schedule USE ONLY RECOMMENDED ENGINE OILS To reset the oil monitoring system to 10096 after each oil change approximately 7 500 miles 12 000 km or six months perform the following 1 Press and release the SELECT RESET stem to display B DIL LIFE XXX OIL LIFE XXX HOLD RESET A NEW HOLD RESET NEW 2 Press and hold the a SELECT RESET stem for two DIL LIFE SET seconds and release Oil life is set to T0 4 495 XX96 and OIL LIFE SET TO XXX is displayed Note To change oil life 10096 miles value from 7 500 miles 12 000 km or six months to another value proceed to Step 3 3 Once OIL LIFE SET TO XXX is displayed release and press the RESET control switch to change the Oil Life Start Value Each release and press will reduce the value by 1096 Note Oil Life Start Value of 10096 equals 7 500 miles 12 000 km or six months For example setting Oil Life Start Value to 6096 sets the Oil Life Start Value
57. information such as e how various systems in your vehicle were operating e whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were buckled e how far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or the brake pedal e how fast the vehicle was traveling and e where the driver was positioning the steering wheel To access this information special equipment must be directly connected to the recording modules Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do not access event data recorder information without obtaining consent unless pursuant to court order or where required by law enforcement other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful authority Other parties may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada 6 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction Vehicle Modification Data Recording Some aftermarket products may cause severe engine and or transmission damage refer to the What is not covered section in The new vehicle limited warranty for your vehicle chapter of your vehicle s Warranty Guide for more information Some vehicles are equipped with Powertrain Control Systems that can detect and store information about vehicle modifications that increase horsepower and torque output this information cannot be erased and will stay in the system s memory even if the modification is removed When a dealer or repair facility works
58. into 1 First when the vehicle reaches slower speeds Forced downshifts e Allowed in D Drive with Overdrive or D Drive without Overdrive e Depress the accelerator to the floor e Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement e If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement slow down but avoid severe brake application ease the vehicle back onto the pavement only after reducing your speed Do not turn the steering wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface e t may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow down gradually before returning to the pavement You may lose control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too sharply or abruptly e t often may be less risky to strike small objects such as highway reflectors with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide sideways out of control or roll over Remember your safety and the safety of others should be your primary concern WARNING Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and four wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a lower center of gravity Utility and four wheel drive vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off road conditions Avoi
59. lamp assembly from the rear door 3 Remove bulb socket from lamp assembly by turning counterclockwise 4 Pull the bulb out from socket and push in the new bulb To install the new bulb follow the removal procedures in reverse order 55 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights Replacing stop turn tail side marker backup lamp bulbs The stop turn tail side marker backup lamp bulbs are located in the tail lamp assembly Follow the same steps to replace any of the bulbs 1 Turn the headlamp switch to the off position and then remove the four screws and the lamp assembly from vehicle 2 Rotate bulb socket counterclockwise and remove from lamp assembly 3 Carefully pull the bulb straight out of the socket and push in the new bulb To install the lamp follow the removal procedures in reverse order 56 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls MULTI FUNCTION LEVER Windshield wiper Rotate the end of the control away from you to Y increase the speed of the wipers i rotate towards you to decrease the speed of the wipers Windshield washer Push the end of the stalk e briefly causes a single swipe of the wipers without washer fluid gt e a quick push and hold the wipers will swipe three times with washer fluid e a long push and hold the wipers and washer fluid will be activated for up to ten seconds Courtesy wi
60. latch engage Make sure the tongue is latched securely by pulling on it 5 To put the retractor in the automatic locking mode grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull downward until all of the belt is pulled out 6 Allow the belt to retract to remove slack The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode 7 Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is in the automatic locking mode you should not be able to pull more belt out If the retractor is not locked unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus 123 Seating and Safety Restraints 8 Remove remaining slack from the belt Force the seat down with extra x weight e g by pressing down or kneeling on the child restraint while pulling up on the shoulder belt in order to force slack from the belt This is necessary to remove the remaining slack that will exist once the additional weight of the child is added to the child restraint It also helps to achieve the proper snugness of the child seat to the vehicle Sometimes a slight lean D the buckle will additionally help to remove remaining slack from the belt 9 Attach the tether strap if the child seat is equipped Refer to Attaching child safety seats with tether straps later in this chapter 10 Before placing the child in the seat forcibly move the seat forward a
61. manufacturer s instructions and warnings provided for installation and use in conjunction with the instructions and warnings provided by the vehicle manufacturer A safety seat that is improperly installed or utilized is inappropriate for your child s height age or weight or does not properly fit the child may increase the risk of serious injury or death 119 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision which may result in serious injury or death WARNING Never use pillows books or towels to boost a child They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a collision WARNING Always restrain an unoccupied child seat or booster seat These objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop which may increase the risk of serious injury WARNING Never place or allow a child to place the shoulder belt under a child s arm or behind the back because it reduces the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision WARNING Do not leave children unreliable adults or pets unattended in your vehicle Transporting children Always make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is appropriate for their age height and weight All chi
62. on your vehicle it may be necessary for them to access the information in the Powertrain Control System This information will likely identify if any unauthorized modifications have been made to the system and may be used to determine if repairs will be covered by warranty Special instructions For your added safety your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic controls WARNING Please read the section Airbag Supplemental Restraint System SRS in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal injury WARNING Front seat mounted rear facing child or infant seats should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag Notice to owners of diesel powered vehicles Read the 6 0 and 6 4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner s Guide Supplement for information regarding correct operation and maintenance of your Diesel powered light truck Notice to owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction Before you drive your vehicle please read this Owner s Guide carefully Your vehicle is not a passenger car As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury or
63. passenger tire inflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi 14 to 28 kPa from a cold start situation If the vehicle is stationary over night with the outside temperature significantly lower than the daytime temperature the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi 20 7 kPa for a drop of 30 F 16 6 C in ambient temperature This lower pressure value may be detected by the TPMS as being significantly lower than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the TPMS warning for low tire pressure If the low tire pressure warning light is ON visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat If one or more tires are flat repair as necessary Check air pressure in the road tires If any tire is under inflated carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest location where air can be added to the tires Inflate all the tires to the recommended inflation pressure 160 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading TPMS reset procedure if applicable The TPMS reset tool is ONLY provided for vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures The TPMS reset procedure needs to be performed after tire rotation only on these vehicles WARNING To determine if your vehicle has different recommended pressures for the front and rear tires refer to the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door See Vehicl
64. portion of the cargo lamp the center light can be turned on when the headlamp control is rotated fully counterclockwise or P T when any door is opened With the ignition key in the accessory or on position the rear lamp can be turned on or off by sliding the control Front and rear courtesy reading lamps The dome portion of the lamp the center light can be turned on when the headlamp control is rotated fully counterclockwise or when any door is opened The reading lamp portion the two outer lights can only be toggled on and off at the lamp BULB REPLACEMENT Headlamp condensation Exterior lamps are vented to accommodate normal changes in pressure Condensation can be a natural by product of this design When moist air enters the lamp assembly through the vents condensation can occur when the temperature is cold When normal condensation occurs a thin film of mist can form on the interior of the lens The thin mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during normal operation Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry weather conditions Examples of acceptable condensation are e Presence of thin mist no streaks drip marks or droplets e Fine mist covers less than 5096 of the lens 50 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights Examples of unacceptable moisture usually caused by a lamp water leak
65. problems and a loss of security protection Note Large metallic objects electronic devices that are used to purchase gasoline or similar items or a second coded key on the same key chain may cause vehicle starting issues You need to prevent these objects from touching the coded key while starting the engine These objects will not cause damage to the coded key but may cause a momentary issue if they are too close to the key when starting the engine If a problem occurs turn the ignition off remove all objects on the key chain away from the coded key and restart the engine Note Do not leave a duplicate coded key in the vehicle Always take your keys and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle Anti theft indicator The anti theft indicator is located in the instrument cluster Vehicles equipped with the A SecuriLock Passive Anti theft system behave as follows R e When the ignition is in the off position the indicator will flash once every two seconds for a total of 10 seconds to indicate the SecuriLock system is functioning as a theft deterrent e When the ignition is in the on position the indicator will glow for three seconds to indicate a programmed key has been validated and the SecuriLock Passive Anti theft system has enabled the engine Vehicles without the SecuriLock Passive Anti theft system behave as follows e When the ignition is in the off position the indicator will not flash e When th
66. ratiu Trailer Weight trailer ft Ib kg m E 350 Stripped Chassis 158 wheelbase single rear wheel 9600 GVWR 13000 13000 E 350 Stripped Chassis 138 wheelbase dual rear wheel 10000 GVWR 13000 18500 E 350 Stripped Chassis 138 wheelbase dual rear wheel 11500 GVWR 13000 18500 E 350 Stripped Chassis 158 wheelbase dual rear wheel 10000 GVWR 13000 18500 E 350 Stripped Chassis 158 wheelbase dual rear wheel 12500 GVWR 13000 18500 8391 10000 4536 60 5 52 180 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading GCWR Gross Combined Weight Rating Trailer Weights Rear Maximum Maximum ie Loaded frontal Reo Tatio Trailer Weight trailer ft lb kg m E 350 Stripped Chassis 176 wheelbase dual rear wheel 10000 GVWR 13000 4 10 5897 8300 3765 60 5 52 18500 8391 10000 4536 60 5 52 E 350 Stripped Chassis 176 wheelbase dual rear wheel 12500 GVWR 13000 6897 8300 3765 60 5 52 18500 8391 10000 4536 60 5 52 E 450 Cutaway 158 wheelbase dual rear wheel 14050 GVWR 14050 E 450 Cutaway 176 wheelbase dual rear wheel 14050 GVWR 14050 E 450 Cutaway 158 wheelbase dual rear wheel 14500 GVWR 20000 E 450 Cutaway 176 wheelbase dual rear wheel 14500 GVWR 20000 9072 10000 4536 60 5 52 181 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tir
67. to 3 000 miles 4 800 km and 120 days System check Press and hold the SELECT RESET stem to select SYSTEM CHECK when HOLD RESET FOR SYSTEM CHECK is displayed in the message center Selecting this function from the INFO MENU causes the message center to cycle through each of the systems being monitored For each of the monitored systems the message center will indicate either an OK message or a warning message for two seconds Pressing the SELECT RESET stem cycles the message center through each of the systems being monitored 73 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls The sequence of the system check report and how it appears in the message center is as follows 1 OIL LIFE ENGINE HOURS Diesel engine only ENGINE IDLE HOURS Diesel engine only CHARGING SYSTEM AIR FILTER Diesel engine only DOOR AJAR BRAKE SYSTEM 8 TBC GAIN XX X NO TRAILER if equipped and no trailer connected 9 TBC GAIN XX X OUTPUT Gf equipped and trailer connected 10 XX MILES TO E FUEL LEVEL XXX System warnings Noon au W PO System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your vehicle s operating systems In the event of a multiple warning situation the message center will cycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for four seconds The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no more warning messages
68. to access the previous folder on MP3 discs if available 31 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 10 FF Fast forward Press FF to manually advance in a CD MP3 track 11 REW Rewind Press REW to manually reverse in a CD MP3 track 12 Memory presets To set a station select the desired frequency band AM FM1 or FM2 Tune to the desired station Press and hold a preset button until sound returns and PRESET SAVED appears in the display You can save up to 18 stations six in AM six in FM1 and FM2 In satellite radio mode if equipped there are 18 available presets six each for SAT1 SAT2 and SATS To save satellite channels in your memory presets tune to the desired channel then press and hold a preset control until sound returns Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 13 TEXT SCAN In radio and CD MP3 mode press and hold to Ea hear a brief sampling of radio stations or CD tracks In CD MP3 mode press and release to display track title artist name and disc title and file name if available In satellite radio mode if equipped press and release to enter TEXT MODE and display the current song title While in TEXT MODE press again to scroll through the current song title artist channel category and the SIRIUS long channel name In TEXT MODE sometimes the display requir
69. video camera Cutaway run start 227 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Protected Circuits Location Rating PATS RF module 37 10A Climate control Stripped chassis IP 1 run start 20A Not used spare 20A Radio Navigation 20A 41 15A Radio Switch illumination Reverse camera mirror 10A 43 10A Overhead console Stripped chassis IP1 10A Auxiliary Battery Relay 45 5A Wipers Stripped chassis Engine connector 3 PADI 47 30A circuit Windows accessory delay O uer eee Power distribution box The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment The power distribution box contains high current fuses that protect your vehicle s main electrical systems from overloads WARNING Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current fuses WARNING To reduce risk of electrical shock always replace the cover to the Power Distribution Box before reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid reservoirs If your vehicle is equipped with an auxiliary battery disconnecting the primary under hood battery DOES NOT remove power from all circuits If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected refer to the Battery section of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter 228 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies
70. with tether straps and Recommendations for attaching safety restraints for children in this chapter for more information Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for child seat installation at the following locations e Five passenger crew van e Seven passenger wagon L LL e Eight passenger wagon 125 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 2 X J e Twelve passenger wagon f 40 e Fifteen passenger wagon The LATCH lower anchors are located at the rear section of the NS rear seat between the cushion and seatback Follow the child seat manufacturer s instructions to properly install a child seat with LATCH attachments 4 D C l l l l Follow the instructions on attaching child safety seats with tether straps Refer to Attaching child safety seats with tether straps later in this chapter Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the anchors shown WARNING Never attach two child safety seats to the same anchor In a crash one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child safety seat attachments and may break causing serious injury or death If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments and have attached the to
71. with the rear view mirror and the side mirrors for maximum coverage WARNING Objects that are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper might not be seen on the screen due to the limited coverage of the reverse camera system WARNING Backup as slow as possible since higher speeds might limit your reaction time to stop the vehicle WARNING Do not use the reverse camera system with the backdoor open If the back end of the vehicle is hit or damaged then check with your authorized dealer to have your rear video system checked for proper coverage and operation 218 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Night time and dark area use At night time or in dark areas the reverse camera system relies on the reverse lamp lighting to produce an image Therefore it is necessary that both reverse lamps are operating in order to get a clear image in the dark If either of the lamps are not operating stop using the reverse camera system at least in the dark until the lamp s are replaced and functioning Servicing e If the image comes on while the vehicle is not in R Reverse have the system inspected by your authorized dealer e If the image is not clear then check if there is anything covering the lens such as dirt mud ice snow etc If the image is still not clear after cleaning have your system inspected by your authorized dealer VEHICLE USED AS A STATIONARY POWER SOURCE A
72. your vehicle 1 Turn the engine off 2 Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise until it spins off 3 Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe 4 To install the cap align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the filler pipe 5 Turn the filler cap clockwise 1 4 of a turn until it clicks at least once If the check fuel cap light R or a check fuel cap message comes on the fuel filler cap may not be properly installed The light or message can come on after several driving events after you ve refueled your vehicle 284 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications At the next opportunity safely pull off of the road remove the fuel filler cap align the cap properly and reinstall it The check fuel cap light R or check fuel cap message may not reset immediately it may take several driving cycles for the check fuel cap light or check fuel cap message to turn off A driving cycle consists of an engine start up after four or more hours with the engine off followed by city and highway driving Continuing to drive with the check fuel cap light or check fuel cap message on may cause the K light to turn on as well If you must replace the fuel filler cap replace it with a fuel filler cap that is designed for your vehicle The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the correct genuine Ford Mo
73. 09 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus 90 90 98 107 117 136 138 140 156 167 174 184 189 190 190 195 197 198 205 214 217 221 221 222 223 225 232 241 242 248 250 257 257 Table of Contents Cleaning 258 Underbody preservation 263 Maintenance and Specifications 265 Engine compartment 267 Engine oil 269 Battery 272 Engine coolant 275 Fuel information 281 Air filter s 300 Part numbers 302 Maintenance product specifications and capacities 303 Engine data 310 Accessories 314 Index 316 All rights reserved Reproduction by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying recording or by any information storage and retrieval system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written authorization from Ford Motor Company Ford may change the contents without notice and without incurring obligation Copyright 2008 Ford Motor Company 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction CONGRATULATIONS Congratulations on acquiring your new Ford Please take the time to get well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook The more you know and understand about your vehicle the greater the safety and pleasure you will derive from driving it For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the following website e In the United States www ford com e n Canada www ford ca e n Australia www
74. 5 bar For Full Size and Dissimilar spare tires see Dissimilar Spare Tire Wheel Information section for description Store and maintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or the Tire Label 6 Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air leak 7 Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges cuts or bulges 142 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Tire inflation information All tires with Steel Carcass Plies if equipped This type of tire utilizes steel cords in the sidewalls As such they cannot be treated like normal light truck tires Tire service including adjusting tire pressure must be performed by personnel trained supervised and equipped according to Federal Occupational Safety and Health Administration OSHA regulations For example during any procedure involving tire inflation the technician or individual must utilize a remote inflation device and ensure that all persons are clear of the trajectory area P WARNING An inflated tire and rim can be very dangerous if improperly used serviced or maintained To reduce the risk of serious injury never attempt to re inflate a tire which has been run flat or seriously under inflated without first removing the tire from the wheel
75. A fus Seating and Safety Restraints S O S Post Crash Alert The S O S Post Crash Alert automatically flashes the turn signal lamps and sounds the horn three times at four second intervals in the event of a serious impact that deploys an airbag front side side curtain or Safety Canopy9 or the safety belt pretensioners The S O S Post Crash Alert can be turned off when any one of the following actions are taken by the driver or any other person e pressing the hazard control button e or pressing the panic button on the remote entry transmitter The feature will continue to operate until the vehicle runs out of power Disposal of airbags and airbag equipped vehicles including pretensioners Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Airbags MUST BE disposed of by qualified personnel Passenger airbag ON OFF switch if equipped Note The passenger airbag ON OFF switch if equipped may be on vehicles with no rear seats and a gross vehicle weight rating GVWR greater than 8500 Ib 3856 kg See Vehicle loading with and without a trailer in the Tires Wheels and loading chapter WARNING An airbag ON OFF switch if equipped may have been installed in this vehicle Before driving always look at the face of the oN AIRBAG switch to be sure the switch is in the proper position in accordance with these instructions and warnings Failure to put the switch in a proper position can increase the risk of seri
76. ATING YOUR TIRES Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly inflated Every day before you drive check your tires If one looks lower than the others use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if required Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure without appearing flat At least once a month and before long trips inspect each tire and check the tire pressure with a tire gauge including spare if equipped Inflate all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge as automatic service station gauges may be inaccurate Ford Motor Company recommends the use of a digital or dial type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick type tire pressure gauge Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire performance and wear Under inflation or over inflation may cause uneven treadwear patterns WARNING Under inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and may result in severe tire cracking tread separation or blowout with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury Under inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire It also may result in unnecessary tire stress irregular wear loss of vehicle control and accidents A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not appear to be flat
77. AX e S0L0CW MSu 10706 AX uor vorgroods ploy 19qumu 34ed p o q 91UueoLmqrrT oxy Teo ongeuju amp g OF T MG AVS TO 1299 prod4H 06 AVS 16 squid z 9 CI16 8 squid egg CIT squid 99 vo CIg e Squid 6 9 oner OKL opp ue OGE H SPcIN 09IN pm oxe EeuorjuoAuOS eued OSP A AHELZW GHOZN pmp oxy dig pour eueq 088 0 AAL9ZW AAOLIN pmp ev dig pour eueq 0S8 4 0S0 4 SPIND 09N pmp ev dig pewury eueq 306 Owners Guide 1st Printing 2009 Econoline eco USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 9je1juo2uo IOUSeA DIPTISDUIM TOP sxrenb zy umrurodq 47e424030 X ping J9uSeA p 9n SputAA cV 9IdSIC HSA V 6 0Z 0Gv M CHELZW GHOAN ping exe TeuonuoAuoo eue T 088 0 TAL9IZI AAOLIN ping exe TeuonuoAuoo eueq 0S8 M 0ST M SPEND 09IN ping Ixe TeuonuoAuoo eue T uorn vorgro ods ploy CI16 8 squid egg V 1610gI dS que2uquT amy eo squid 9 16 06AA08 AX umnuerg 06 mog avg OTS SHH 99 aED squid g9 307 Owners Guide 1st Printing 2009 Econoline eco USA fus Maintenance and Specifications osuel Surjerodo ewou s yonsdip oy uo uorjeorput ay Aq Jos oq prnous o49 pmg pue prnj uorssrursueg jo 3unoure au Ap quiesse Jey 910uI9J YIM peddmbea jt pu Jo 009 se 0 IO ue YM p ddmb jr 19 000 xuej ur ue qr peddmbo Jt ezts 19 005 uo poseq rea Lew suoreordde eurog Ajroedeo qg amp rp ejeurrxoadde Auo sojeorpur reur UOLO Tdv 9u pue Y O
78. CK 2c Cot tee 269 filter specifications 271 302 recommendations 271 refill capacities sss 303 specifications ecco 303 317 Index Event data recording 6 Exhaust fumes 193 F Fail safe cooling 280 Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV 281 Fluid capacities 303 Four Wheel Drive vehicles preparing to drive your vehicle 1st eee Eee ter ue xs 203 ui 281 calculating fuel economy 288 urom 284 Capacity re nettes 303 choosing the right fuel 286 comparisons with EPA fuel economy estimates 291 detergent in fuel 286 filling your vehicle with fiel eto 281 284 288 filter specifications 281 302 fuel pump shut off switch 223 improving fuel economy 288 octane rating 286 310 QUANT essor tt theres 287 running out of fuel 287 safety information relating to automotive fuels 281 Fuel flex fuel vehicle FFY J scenes reete ots 281 286 FUSES eones unnai 225 G Garage door opener 59 Gas cap see Fuel cap 284 Gas mileage see Fuel economy 288 318 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus GAUL ES Mm 17 H Hazard flashers 222 Head restraint
79. CT RESET stem to select a new language Selectable languages are English Spanish and French 3 Press the SELECT RESET stem for the next SETUP MENU item or wait for more than four seconds to return to the INFO MENU Autolock This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when the vehicle is shifted into any gear and when the vehicle is in motion over 13 mph 20 km h or higher 1 To disable enable the autolock _ feature select this function from the RUTOLDE amp A SETUP MENU gt ON ger 2 Press and hold the SELECT RESET stem to turn the autolock feature ON or OFF 3 Press the SELECT RESET stem for the next SETUP MENU item or wait for more than four seconds to return to the INFO MENU Autounlock This feature automatically unlocks all vehicle doors when the driver s door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being turned off 1 To disable enable the autounlock feature select this function from the AUTBUNLBES SETUP MENU gt ON GFF 2 Press and hold the SELECT RESET stem to turn the autounlock ON or OFF 3 Press the SELECT RESET stem for the next SETUP MENU item or wait for more than four seconds to return to the INFO MENU Park Aid if equipped This feature sounds a warning tone to warn the driver of obstacles near the rear bumper and functions only when R Reverse gear is selected 1 To disable enable the reverse sensing system feature with the vehicle in P Park select this he
80. Dearborn MI 48121 Telephone 1 800 392 3673 FORD TDD for the hearing impaired 1 800 232 5952 Online Additional information and resources are available online at www genuineservice com U S dealer locator by Dealer Name City State or Zip Code Owner Guides Maintenance Schedules Recalls Ford Extended Service Plans Ford Genuine Accessories e Service specials and promotions 250 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance In Canada Mailing Address Ford vehicles Customer Relationship Centre Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited P O Box 2000 Oakville Ontario L6J 5E4 Telephone 1 800 565 3673 FORD Online www ford ca Mailing Address Lincoln vehicles Lincoln Centre Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited P O Box 2000 Oakville Ontario L6J 5E4 Telephone 1 800 387 9333 Online www lincolncanada com Away from home motorhome service If you own a motorhome built on a Ford Chassis and are away from home when your vehicle needs service or if you need more help than the authorized dealer could provide after following the steps above contact the Ford Motorhome Customer Assistance Center to find an authorized dealer or service location to help you In the United States and Canada Ford Motorhome Customer Assistance Center 900 N Lake Havasu Avenue Lake Havasu City AZ 86403 1 800 444 3311 Open 365 24 7 In order to help service your motorhome v
81. G Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints Never place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must transport a forward facing child in the front seat move the seat all the way back and use appropriate restraints WARNING National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches 25 cm between an occupant s chest and the driver airbag module WARNING Never place your arm over the air bag module as a deploying air bag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries To properly position yourself away from the airbag e Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably e Recline the seat slightly one or two degrees from the upright position 108 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Do not put anything on or over the air bag module Placing objects on or over the air bag inflation area may cause those objects to be propelled by the air bag into your face and torso causing serious injury WARNING Do not attempt to service repair or modify the airbag supplemental restraint systems or its fuses Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible WARNING Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of the vehicle including frame bumper front end body structure a
82. Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for LT type tires LT type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires these differences are described below Note Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire 1 LT Indicates a tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association T amp RA that is intended for service on light trucks 2 Load Range Load Inflation Limits Indicates the tire s load carrying capabilities and its inflation limits 3 Maximum Load Dual Ib kg at psi kPa cold Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual defined as four tires on the rear axle a total of six or more tires on the vehicle 4 Maximum Load Single Ib kg at psi kPa cold Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single defined as two tires total on the rear axle 154 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Information on T type tires T type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires these differences are described below T145 80D16 is an example of a tire size Note The temporary tire size for your vehicle may be different from this example Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire 1 T Indicates a type of tire designated by the Tire and Ri
83. Habits e Smooth moderate operation can yield up to 1096 savings in fuel e Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel economy 289 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Idling for long periods of time greater than one minute may waste fuel Anticipate stopping slowing down may eliminate the need to stop Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy Slow down gradually Driving at reasonable speeds traveling at 55 mph 88 km h uses 1596 less fuel than traveling at 65 mph 105 km h Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if unnecessary shifting between the top gears occurs Unnecessary shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel economy Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may reduce fuel economy Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel economy Combine errands and minimize stop and go driving Maintenance Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel economy Use recommended engine oil Refer to Maintenance product specifications amd capacities in this chapter Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items Follow the recommended maint
84. Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child safety seat systems periodically to make sure they work properly and are not damaged Inspect the vehicle and child seat safety belts to make sure there are no nicks tears or cuts Replace if necessary All vehicle safety belt assemblies including retractors buckles front safety belt buckle assemblies buckle support assemblies slide bar if equipped shoulder belt height adjusters if equipped shoulder belt guide on seatback if equipped child safety seat LATCH and tether anchors and attaching hardware should be inspected after a collision Refer to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions for additional inspection and maintenance information specific to the child restraint Ford Motor Company recommends that all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a collision be replaced However if the collision was minor and an authorized dealer finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate properly they do not need to be replaced Safety belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted For proper care of soiled safety belts refer to Interior in the Cleaning chapter WARNING Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the safety belt assembly or child restraint system under the above conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision 135 2009 Ec
85. L LOW and sound a chime for one second when you have approximately 50 miles 80 km to empty If you RESET this warning message this display and chime will return within 10 minutes DTE is calculated using a running average fuel economy which is based on your recent driving history of 500 miles 800 km This value is not the same as the average fuel economy display The running average fuel economy is re initialized to a factory default value if the battery is disconnected Average fuel economy AFE Select this function to display your average fuel economy in miles gallon or liters km X AVE fPG 0 0 mi VV NN If you calculate your average fuel economy by dividing miles traveled by gallons of fuel used liters of fuel used by 100 kilometers traveled your figure may be different than displayed for the following reasons e Your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill up e Differences in the automatic shut off points on the fuel pumps at service stations e Variations in top off procedure from one fill up to another e Rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0 1 gallon liter 1 Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles 8 km with the speed control system engaged to display a stabilized average 2 Record the highway fuel economy for future reference It is important to press the SELECT RESET stem press and hold for two seconds in order to reset the function after setting the speed control to get accurate highway
86. NTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL Both U S and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U S DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall 150 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Information on P type tires P215 65R15 95H is an example of a tire size load index and speed rating The definitions of these items are listed below Note that the tire size load index and speed rating for your vehicle may be different from this example 1 P Indicates a tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association T amp RA that may be used for service on cars SUVs minivans and light trucks Note If your tire size does not begin with a letter this may mean it is designated by either ETRTO European Tire and Rim Technical Organization or JATMA Japan Tire Manufacturing Association 2 215 Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge In general the larger the number the wider the tire 3 65 Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire s ratio of height to width 4 R Indicates a radial type tire 5 15 Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches If you change your wheel size you will have t
87. P 03 UOUYDVWUALOfUL BDUDUATUIDUL PaynpayIs 03 19Jo4 PING AT eNOOSIIN SN Apuo prnous AT eNOOUMIW 91mbox yey suorssrusuer oreuro ny 309 Owners Guide 1st Printing 2009 Econoline eco USA fus Maintenance and Specifications ENGINE DATA 4 6L V8 engine 5 4L V8 engine 6 8L V10 engine 28 330 1 415 y m octane Or 87 octane 87 octane 1 3 7 2 6 5 4 8 1 3 7 2 6 5 4 8 1 6 5 10 2 7 3 8 4 9 Coil on plug Coil on plug Coil on plug 0 052 0 056 inch 0 051 0 057 inch 0 052 0 056 inch Spark plug gap 135 149mm 1 29 1 45mm 1 32 1 42mm Compression 9 4 1 9 0 1 9 0 1 ratio Refer to the 6 0 and 6 4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner s Guide Supplement for diesel engine information 4 6L V8 FFV engines only Engine drivebelt routing e 4 6L V8 5 4L V8 and 6 8L V10 engines without A C 310 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications e 4 6L V8 5 4L V8 and 6 8L V10 engines with A C IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE Safety Compliance Certification Label complete Ford built vehicles The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration Regulations require that a Safety Compliance Certification Label be affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where the Safety Compliance Certification Label may be located The Safety Compliance Certification Label is located on the structure B Pillar by the trailing edge of the driver s door or the edge of t
88. Plan Ford ESP coverage It provides the following e Benefits during the warranty period depending on the plan you purchase such as reimbursement for rentals coverage for certain maintenance and wear items e Protection against covered repair costs after your Bumper to Bumper Warranty expires You may purchase Ford ESP from any participating authorized dealer There are several plans available in various time distance and deductible combinations which can be tailored to fit your own driving needs Ford ESP also offers reimbursement benefits for towing and rental coverage When you buy Ford ESP you receive Peace of Mind protection throughout the United States and Canada provided by a network of more than 4 600 participating authorized dealers If you did not take advantage of the Ford Extended Service Plan at the time of purchasing your vehicle you may still be eligible Since this information is subject to change please ask your authorized dealer for complete details about Ford Extended Service Plan coverage options or visit the Ford ESP website at www ford esp com GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U S AND CANADA Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country contact the appropriate foreign embassy or consulate These officials can inform you of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti knock index lower than is recommended f
89. Press SHUFFLE to Ea engage shuffle mode SHUFFLE ON will appear in the display If you wish to engage shuffle mode right away press SEEK to begin random play Otherwise random play will begin when the current track is finished playing CD SHUF will appear in the display To disengage press SHUFFLE SHUFFLE OFF will appear in the display Note In track mode all tracks on the current disc will shuffle in random order In MP3 folder mode the system will randomly play all tracks within the current folder 8 FOLDER In folder mode press FOLDER to access next folder on MP3 discs if available 9 lt q FOLDER In folder mode press ii FOLDER to access the previous folder on MP3 discs if available 10 FF Fast forward Press FF to manually advance in a CD MP3 track 11 REW Rewind Press REW to manually reverse in a CD MPS track 25 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 12 Memory presets To set a CRIT ee Pe station select the desired frequency band AM FM1 or FM2 Tune to the desired station Press and hold a preset button until sound returns and PRESET SAVED appears in the display You can save up to 18 stations six in AM six in FM1 and FM2 13 TEXT SCAN In radio and ES CD MP3 mode press and hold for a brief sampling of radio stations or CD tracks Press again to stop In MP3 mode press and release to display track title artist name and disc t
90. R1 pdf MESSAGE CENTER IF EQUIPPED With the ignition on the message center located on your instrument XXX cluster displays important vehicle information through a constant monitor of vehicle systems You may select display features on the message center for a display of status The system will also notify you of potential vehicle problems with a display of system warnings followed by a long indicator chime VVVVVVVVVVM XXXXXXXXXXX V VY VVVVVVVM XXXX 70000000 Selectable features Press and release the SELECT RESET stem located in the speedometer to scroll and reset the following functions Select or reset the function by holding the SELECT RESET stem for more than two seconds Info menu This menu displays the following control displays e Odometer Trip Odometer e Distance to Empty DTE e Average Fuel Economy AFE e Setup Menu e System check e Blank odometer off 69 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Odometer Trip odometer Refer to Gauges in the Instrument Cluster chapter Distance to empty DTE Selecting this function from the INFO MENU estimates XXX MILES TOE approximately how far you can drive with the fuel remaining in your tank 0 0 mi under normal driving conditions Remember to turn the ignition off when refueling to allow this feature to correctly detect the added fuel The DTE function will display XXX MILES TO E FUEL LEVE
91. S light stays illuminated or ABS Airbag readiness If this light fails e e to illuminate when the ignition is 9 turned to on continues to flash or oN remains on have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer A chime will also sound when a malfunction in the supplemental restraint system has been detected Safety belt Reminds you to fasten your safety belt A Belt Minder chime will also sound to remind you to fasten your safety belt Refer to the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter to activate deactivate the Belt Minder chime feature Engine oil pressure RTT 7 Displays when the oil pressure falls TRIP XXX X below the normal range refer to Om Engine oil in the Maintenance mi and Specifications chapter Engine coolant temperature RTT Displays when the engine TRIP XXX coolant temperature is high Stop nn the vehicle as soon as possible E switch off the engine and let cool Refer to Engine coolant in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter 14 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster WARNING Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot equipped Illuminates when your tire pressure is low If the light remains on at start up or while driving the tire pressure should be checked Refer to Inflating your tires in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter When the ignition is first turned
92. Steps for determining the correct load limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ib on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lb 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1 400 Ib and there will be five 150 Ib passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ib 1400 750 5 x 150 650 Ib In metric units 635 340 5 x 68 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity e Another example for your vehicle with 1 400 Ib 635 kg of cargo and luggage capacity You decide to go golfing Is there enough load capacity to carry you 4 of your friends and all the golf bags You and four friends average 220 Ib
93. Table of Contents Introduction 4 Instrument Cluster 12 Warning lights and chimes 12 Gauges 17 Entertainment Systems 20 AM FM stereo 20 AM FM stereo with CD 22 AM FM stereo with CDX6 MP3 27 Auxiliary input jack 34 Satellite radio information 38 Navigation system 41 Climate Controls 42 Heater only 42 Manual heating and air conditioning 43 Lights 45 Headlamps 45 Turn signal control 49 Bulb replacement 50 Driver Controls 57 Windshield wiper washer control 57 Steering wheel adjustment 58 Power windows 62 Mirrors 63 Speed control 66 Upfitter controls 68 Message center 69 Locks and Security 78 Keys 78 Locks 78 Anti theft system 86 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Table of Contents Seating and Safety Restraints Seating Safety restraints Airbags Child restraints Tires Wheels and Loading Tire information Tire inflation Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS Vehicle loading Trailer towing Trailer brake controller integrated Recreational towing Driving Starting Brakes Traction Control Traction Control AdvanceTrac Transmission operation Reverse sensing system Reverse camera Roadside Emergencies Getting roadside assistance Hazard flasher switch Fuel pump shut off switch Fuses and relays Changing tires Wheel lug nut torque Jump starting Wrecker towing Customer Assistance Reporting safety defects U S only Reporting safety defects Canada only 20
94. Tar Remover ZC 42 which is available from your authorized dealer e Remove any exterior accessories such as antennas before entering a car wash e Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted surface if these substances come in contact with your vehicle wash off as soon as possible e If your vehicle is equipped with running boards do not use rubber plastic and vinyl protectant products on the running board surface as the area may become slippery Exterior chrome e Wash the vehicle first using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo such as Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A e Use Custom Bright Metal Cleaner ZC 15 available from your authorized dealer Apply the product as you would a wax to clean bumpers and other chrome parts allow the cleaner to dry for a few minutes then wipe off the haze with a clean dry rag e Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads as they can scratch the chrome surface 258 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning e After polishing chrome bumpers apply a coating of Motorcraft Premium Liquid Wax ZC 53 A available from your authorized dealer or an equivalent quality product to help protect from environmental effects WAXING e Wash the vehicle first e Do not use waxes that contain abrasives use Motorcraft Premium Liquid Wax ZC 53 A which is available from your authorized dealer or an equivalent quality pr
95. Traction AA Temperature A These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United States Department of Transportation has set Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires They do not apply to deep tread winter type snow tires space saver or temporary use spare tires light truck or LT type tires tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575 104 c 2 U S Department of Transportation Tire quality grades The U S Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you the following information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 112 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AAAB C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C The grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test sur
96. VWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety Compliance Certification label Consult your authorized dealer for specific weight information e The Federal Communications Commission FCC and Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission CRTC regulate the use of mobile communications systems such as two way radios telephones and theft alarms that are equipped with radio transmitters Any such equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service technician e Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your vehicle particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive use e To avoid interference with other vehicle functions such as anti lock braking systems amateur radio users who install radios and antennas onto their vehicle should not locate the Amateur Radio Antennas in the area of the driver s side hood e Electrical or electronic accessories or components that are added to the vehicle by the authorized dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery performance and durability 315 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Index A Accessory delay ssssss 63 Advance Trac ssssssses 198 Air cleaner filter 300 302 Airbag supplemental restraint SY SUO crit o aee ene 107 108 and child safety seats 109 description sssssess 108 disposal
97. You must have all remote entry transmitters maximum of four available before beginning this procedure If all remote entry transmitters are not present during programming procedure the ones missing during programming will no longer operate the vehicle Note Ensure the brake pedal is not depressed during this sequence To reprogram the remote entry 5 transmitters a 1 Ensure the vehicle is 2 Gy electronically unlocked 2 Place the key in the ignition and turn from the 2 lock position to 3 off 85 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security 3 Cycle eight times rapidly within 10 seconds between the 3 off position and 4 on Note The eighth turn must end in the 4 on position 4 The doors will lock then unlock to confirm that the programming mode has been activated 5 Within 20 seconds press any button on the remote entry transmitter Note If more than 20 seconds have passed you will need to start the procedure over again 6 The doors will lock then unlock to confirm that this remote entry transmitter has been programmed 7 Repeat Steps 4 and 5 to program each additional remote entry transmitter up to four transmitters 8 Turn the ignition to the 3 off position after you have finished programming all of the remote entry transmitters 9 The doors will lock then unlock to confirm that the programming mode has been exited Illuminated entry
98. a low power steering pump fluid level If the fluid level is below the FULL COLD range on the dipstick e Some noise is normal during operation If the noise is excessive check for low power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your authorized dealer e Heavy or uneven steering efforts may be caused by low power steering pump fluid level Check for low power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your authorized dealer Do not fill the power steering pump reservoir above the FULL COLD range on the dipstick as this may result in leaks from the reservoir If the power steering system breaks down or if the engine is turned off you can steer the vehicle manually but it takes more effort If the steering wanders or pulls check for e an improperly inflated tire e uneven tire wear e loose or worn suspension components e loose or worn steering components e improper steering alignment A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering seem to wander pull TRACTION LOK AXLE IF EQUIPPED This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces particularly when one wheel is on a poor traction surface Under normal conditions the Traction Lok axle functions like a standard rear axle The axle may exhibit a slight noise or vibration in tight turns with low vehicle speed This is normal behavior and indicates the axle is working PREPARING TO DRIVE WARNING Utility vehicles have a si
99. ace standardized information on the sidewall of all tires This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U S DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built For example the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997 After 2000 the numbers go to four digits For example 2501 means the 25th week of 2001 The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall Tire Replacement Requirements Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and handling capability WARNING Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size load index speed rating and type such as P metric versus LT metric or all season versus all terrain as those originally provided by Ford The recommended tire and wheel size may be found on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label or the Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or edge of the driver s door If this information is not found on these labels then you should contact your authorized dealer
100. acement see your authorized dealer Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for changing the spark plugs Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and design specifications for your vehicle such as Motorcraft or equivalent replacement parts The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not used Also available with 6 0L Diesel engine TorqShift transmission 302 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications jueoriqnr J207 pue SOLI yes pue q 860IW dSM S D asuly 100p Jay STX 10 OX esodunq nmnjy 3j 191030 A Jong sojerd aoxrng sauo1e Sosuly TV S999W SSM PMY exerg SPA TOAIASAI UO X VIN 10 V 6909IN SSM 1030 N LOC 92uteurioj1oq ping ayer O T Wd USTH 3Je191030 N pue NIN uoeoA 1og uorjorgro ods pIo s3ILI9VdY ANY SNOILVOIJ3IO3dS LONGOYd AONVNALNIVIN 303 Owners Guide 1st Printing 2009 Econoline eco USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 9d LEA66IN SSM SjoT ed AL T dols 90A urojsAg Sut 007 3J 194030 N Tuewejddng IPIND s owmo esewq oqunj wonuoetu 120441 9304419 48mog Tt 9 PUY T0 9 BY 03 IJOY T9808 syzenb 9 zg C1887 syzenb pog P940 oo Mo o4 quoge guuo1q CIL 62 syzenb gog WA jue oo7 susug prop umrure1q 3je11030 N Tc LZ send g gz IV ISHA26W SSM q 2470A T9 Pc send 0 97 19 22 send grec uorn vorgro
101. adiator support Note Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe engine damage The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if the correct air filter element is not used 301 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS 7 7 5 4L V8 6 8L V10 Air filter element FA 1632 FA 1632 FA 1632 Battery standard BXT 65 650 BXT 65 650 BXT 65 650 auxiliary BXT 65 750 BXT 65 750 BXT 65 750 Oil filter FL 820 S FL a S FL 820 S PCV valve Spark plugs oo Torqshift automatic M FT 180 FT 180 internal bottom pan filter Refer to the 6 0 and 6 4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner s Guide Supplement for Motorcraft diesel engine service part numbers The PCV valve is a critical emission component It is one of the items listed in scheduled maintenance information and is essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system For PCV valve replacement see your authorized dealer Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for changing the PCV valve Replace the PCV valve with one that meets Ford material and design specifications for your vehicle such as a Motorcraft or equivalent replacement part The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the emissions system if such a PCV valve is not used For spark plug repl
102. al etc Bolt size and wheel Wheel lug nut torque lug nut type 9 16 x 18 conical lug 150 nut 40 00 9 16 x 18 two piece 1 190 lug nut Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners On all two piece flat wheel nuts N apply one drop of motor oil between the flat washer and the nut Do not apply motor oil to the wheel nut threads or the wheel stud threads 241 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies WARNING When a wheel is installed always remove any corrosion dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel Ensure that any fasteners that attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel Installing wheels without correct metal to metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion resulting in loss of control Note Inspect the wheel pilot hole prior to installation If there is visible corrosion in wheel pilot hole remove loose particles by wiping with clean rag and apply grease Apply grease only to the wheel pilot hole surface by smearing a dime 1 square cm sized glob of grease around the wheel pilot surface 1 with end of finger DO NOT
103. alarm secret enses 84 replacement additional CHANSIMIDLENS 1 crea 85 replacing the batteries 84 Reverse camera ss 217 Reverse sensing system 214 Roadside assistance 221 Roll stability control 198 S Safety belts see Safety restraints 98 102 Safety defects reporting 257 Safety restraints 98 102 Belt Minder 103 extension assembly 107 for adults secarei 99 101 for children ect 117 warning light and chime 103 Safety restraints LATCH AanchofS ncc ever er vs 124 Safety seats for children 121 Safety Compliance Certification Label 311 Satellite Radio Information 38 Seals connteteeenive ue nre 90 child safety seats 121 front seals iier td 91 SecuriLock passive anti theft SYSTEM zeiten 86 88 Servicing your vehicle 265 Setting the clock AM FM single CD 23 AM FM stereo sse 21 320 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus AM FM In dash 6 CD 28 Spare tire see Changing the Tire 235 Spark plugs specifications 302 310 Special notice sssssssss 8 ambulance conversions 8 diesel powered vehicles 7 utility type vehicles
104. all or screen 47 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights 7 On the wall or screen locate the high intensity area of the beam pattern The left edge of the high intensity area should be even with the vertical line corresponding to the headlamp under adjustment If the left edge of the high intensity area is not even with the vertical line follow the next step to adjust it 8 Locate the horizontal adjuster 2 for each headlamp Turn it clockwise or counterclockwise to place the left edge of the high intensity area even with the vertical line corresponding to the headlamp under adjustment VERTICAL AIM ADJUSTMENT AERODYNAMIC HEADLAMPS The headlamps on your vehicle can only be vertically adjusted Your vehicle does not require horizontal aim adjustments To adjust the headlamps 1 Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface approximately 25 feet 7 6 meters away e 1 8 feet 2 4 meters e 2 Center height of lamp to ground e 3 25 feet 7 6 meters e 4 Horizontal reference line 2 Measure the height from the zz center of your headlamp indicated AY by a 3 0 mm circle on the lens to the ground and mark an 8 foot 2 4 meter horizontal reference line on the vertical wall or screen at this height a piece of masking tape works well 3 Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and open the hood Cover one of the hea
105. ally designed to work with airbags to help reduce the risk of injury in a collision The energy management safety belt is designed to give or release additional belt webbing in some accidents to reduce concentration of force on an occupant s chest and reduce the risk of certain bone fractures and injuries to underlying organs In a crash if the airbag is turned OFF this energy management safety belt might permit the person wearing the belt to move forward enough to incur a serious or fatal injury The more severe the crash and the heavier the occupant the greater the risk is Be sure the airbag is turned ON for any person who does not qualify under the NHTSA deactivation criteria Transport Canada deactivation criteria Canada Only 1 Infant An infant less than 1 year old must ride in the front seat because e my vehicle has no rear seat e the rear seat in my vehicle cannot accommodate a rear facing infant seat or the infant has a medical condition which according to the infant s physician makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front seat so that the driver can monitor the infant s condition 2 Child age 12 or under A child age 12 or under must ride in the front seat because e my vehicle has no rear seat e although children age 12 and under ride in the rear seat whenever possible children age 12 and under have no option but to sometimes ride in the front seat because rear seat space is insufficient or the
106. and similar items e Be sure that the engine block heater heater cord and extension cord are solidly connected A poor connection can cause the cord to become very hot and may result in an electrical shock or fire Be sure 194 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving to check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system has been operating for approximately a half hour e Finally have the engine block heater system checked during your fall tune up to be sure it s in good working order How to use the engine block heater Ensure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use To clean them use a dry cloth Depending on the type of factory installed equipment your engine block heater system may consume anywhere between 400 watts or 1000 watts of energy per hour Your factory installed block heater system does not have a thermostat however maximum temperature is attained after approximately three hours of operation Block heater operation longer than 3 hours will not improve system performance and will unnecessarily use additional electricity Make sure system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving the vehicle While not in use make sure the protective cover seals the prongs of the engine block heater cord plug BRAKES Occasional brake noise is normal If a metal to metal continuous grinding or continuous squeal sound is present the brake linings may be worn out a
107. and Specifications chapter CHECK REAR PARK AID if equipped Displayed when the transmission is in R Reverse Refer to Reverse sensing system in the Driving chapter LOW TIRE PRESSURE if equipped Displayed when one or more tires on your vehicle have low tire pressure Refer to Inflating Your Tires in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT if equipped Displayed when the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is malfunctioning If the warning stays on or continues to come on have the system inspected by your authorized dealer TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT if equipped Displayed when a tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning or your spare tire is in use For more information on how the system operates under these conditions refer to Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible 76 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls CHECK AIR FILTER Diesel engine only Refer to nstrument Cluster in your 6 0 and 6 4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner s Guide Supplement DRAIN WATER SEPARATOR Diesel engine only Displayed when the water separator has reached a predetermined capacity and needs to be drained Refer to your 6 0 amd 6 4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner s G
108. and capacities in this chapter Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant in this section Severe climates If you drive in extremely cold climates less than 34 F 36 C e It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration above 50 e NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60 e Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60 will decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage e Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the winter months If you drive in extremely hot climates e It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration above 40 e NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40 e Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40 will decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage 279 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications e Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40 will decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage e Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate protection at the temperatures in which you drive Vehic
109. and rear direction signals will flash Press the flasher control again to turn them off Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists Note With extended use the flasher may run down your battery 222 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies FUEL PUMP SHUT OFF SWITCH DIESEL POWERED AND STRIPPED CHASSIS VEHICLES ONLY This device stops the electric fuel pump from sending fuel to the engine when your vehicle has had a substantial jolt After an accident if the engine cranks but does not start this switch may have been activated On diesel powered vehicles this switch is located in the front passenger s footwell by the kick panel 223 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies On commercial stripped chassis vehicles this switch is located on a bracket above the brake pedal To reset the switch 1 Turn the ignition off 2 Check the fuel system for leaks 3 If no leaks are apparent reset the switch by pushing in on the reset button 4 Turn the ignition on 5 Wait a few seconds and return the key to off 6 Make another check for leaks Fuel pump shut off gas engines except stripped chassis In the event of a moderate to severe collision this vehicle is equipped with a fuel pump shut off feature t
110. and state or provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety of children in your vehicle e When possible always properly restrain children twelve 12 years of age and under in a rear seating position of your vehicle Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in a front seating position 118 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children Use any attachment method as indicated below by X Safety Safety belt Safety Restraint Child Type Weight Rear facing child seat Forward facing child seat child seat 21 kg WARNING Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active air bag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the vehicle seat all the way back When possible all children age 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position If all children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating position properly restrain the largest child in the front seat WARNING Always carefully follow the instructions and warnings provided by the manufacturer of any child restraint to determine if the restraint device is appropriate for your child s size height weight or age Follow the child restraint
111. ar To put your vehicle in P Park e Come to a complete stop e Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P Park WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle 207 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving R Reverse With the gearshift lever in R Reverse the vehicle will move backward Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R Reverse N Neutral With the gearshift lever in N Neutral the vehicle can be started and is free to roll Hold the brake pedal down while in this position 9 Overdrive The normal driving position for the best fuel economy Transmission P RN P 2 1 l operates in gears one through four Overdrive can be deactivated by y pressing the transmission control Ex switch on the end of the gearshift ON OFF 4 lever E The O D OFF lamp will illuminate in 0 D the instrument cluster OFF Drive not shown Drive is activated when the transmission control switch is pressed e This position allows for all forward gears except overdrive e O D OFF lamp is illuminated e Provides engine braking e Use when driving conditions cause excessive shifting from O D to other gears Examples heavy city traffic where continuous shifting in and out of overdrive occurs hilly terrain heavy loads t
112. are e Water puddle inside the lamp e Large water droplets drip marks or streaks present on the interior of the lens Take your vehicle to dealer for service if any of the above conditions of unacceptable moisture are present Using the right bulbs Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below Headlamp bulbs must be marked with an authorized D O T for North America and an E for Europe to ensure lamp performance light brightness and pattern and safe visibility The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn time Function Number of Trade number bulbs Headlamps sealed beam 2 H6054 Park lamp with aerodynamic 2 3157A or 3157AK Park lamp with sealed beam 2 f 3157K _ Side marker with aerodynamic 2 f 6B Side marker with sealed beam 2 1 Back up lamps 2 3156Kor3156 bPo bo b5 Pb2 Db5 Db5 License plate lamp L uw O O Stop tail turn side marker 3457K or 3357K lamp High mount brakelamp 211 2 WOR ae 51 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights Replacing exterior bulbs Check the operation of all bulbs frequently Replacing headlamp bulbs aerodynamic 1 Make sure the headlamp switch is in the off position and open the hood 2 Remove the three screws from the top and bottom front of the headlamp assembly and pull the assembly straight out
113. arning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible 75 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls XXX MILES TO E FUEL LEVEL LOW Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel condition WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER if equipped Displayed and accompanied by a single chime if there are certain faults in the vehicle wiring and trailer wiring brake system Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for more information TRAILER BRAKE MODULE FAULT if equipped Displayed and accompanied by a single chime in response to faults sensed by the TBC Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for more information TRAILER CONNECTED if equipped Displayed when a correct trailer connection a trailer with electric trailer brakes is sensed during a given ignition cycle Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for more information TRAILER DISCONNECTED if equipped Displayed and accompanied by a single chime when a trailer connection becomes disconnected either intentionally or unintentionally and has been sensed during a given ignition cycle Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for more information BRAKE FLUID LEVEL LOW Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the brake system should be inspected immediately Refer to Brake fluid in the Maintenance
114. as soon as possible Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death Additionally the use of non recommended tires and wheels could cause steering suspension axle or transfer case power transfer unit failure If you have questions regarding tire replacement contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible 146 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading WARNING When mounting replacement tires and wheels you should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional precautions listed below If the beads do not seat at the maximum pressure indicated re lubricate and try again When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall the following precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire 1 Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size 2 Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again 3 Stand at a minimum of 12 ft 3 66 m away from the tire wheel assembly 4 Use both eye and ear protection For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi greater than the maximum pressure a Ford Dealer or other tire service professional should do the mounting Always inflate steel ca
115. ation criteria SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety restraints for children Also see Airbag supplemental restraint system SRS in this chapter for special instructions about using airbags Important child restraint precautions WARNING Always make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is appropriate for their height age and weight Child safety restraints must be purchased separately from the vehicle Failure to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child WARNING All children are shaped differently The Recommendations for Safety Restraints are based on probable child height age and weight thresholds from NHTSA and other safety organizations or are the minimum requirements of law Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician CPST and your pediatrician to make sure your child seat is appropriate for your child and is compatible with and properly installed in the vehicle To locate a child seat fitting station and CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1 888 327 4236 or on the internet at http www nhtsa dot gov Failure to properly restrain children in safety seats made especially for their height age and weight may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child 117 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA
116. ation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires O As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system ma
117. authorized dealer as soon as possible Tire rotation On vehicles with different front and without rear tire pressures the TPMS system sensor must be retrained following every training tire rotation Refer to Tire rotation in this chapter 159 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Low Tire Possible Customer Action Required Pressure cause Warning Light Flashing Warning Spare tire in Your temporary spare tire is in use Repair the damaged road wheel and re mount it on the vehicle to restore system functionality For a description of how the system functions under these conditions refer to When your temporary spare tire is installed in this section TPMS If your tires are properly inflated and malfunction your spare tire is not in use and the TPMS warning light still flashes contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible When inflating your tires When putting air into your tires such as at a gas station or in your garage the Tire Pressure Monitoring System may not respond immediately to the air added to your tires It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph 82 km h for the light to turn OFF after you have filled your tires to the recommended inflation pressure How temperature affects your tire pressure The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic tire While driving in a normal manner a typical
118. begin 1 Insert the first previously programmed coded key into the ignition and turn the ignition from 3 the 3 off position to the 4 on As position maintain ignition in the 4 2 on position for at least one second but no more than 10 seconds 2 Turn ignition from the 4 on position back to the 3 off position in order to remove the first coded key from the ignition 3 Within 10 seconds of removing the first coded key insert the second previously programmed coded key into the ignition and turn the ignition from the 3 off position to the 4 on position maintain ignition in the 4 on position for at least one second but no more than 10 seconds 88 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security 4 Turn the ignition from the 4 on position back to the 3 off position in order to remove the second coded key from the ignition 5 Within 10 seconds of removing the second coded key insert the new unprogrammed key new key valet key into the ignition and turn the ignition from the 3 off position to the 4 on position maintain ignition in the 4 on position for at least one second but no more than 10 seconds This step will program your new key to a coded key 6 To program additional new unprogrammed key s repeat Steps 1 through 5 If successful the new coded key s will start the vehicle s engine and the theft indicator will illuminate for three seconds
119. ble The spare tire carrier will not allow you to overtighten If the spare tire carrier ratchets or slips with little effort take the vehicle to your authorized dealer for assistance at your earliest convenience 240 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 4 Check that the tire lies flat against the frame and is properly tightened Try to push or pull then turn the tire to be sure it will not move Loosen and retighten if necessary Failure to properly stow the spare tire may result in failure of the winch cable and loss of the tire 5 Repeat this tightness check procedure when servicing the spare tire pressure every six months as per your scheduled maintenance information or at any time that the spare tire is disturbed through service of other components 6 If removed install the spare tire lock if equipped into the bumper drive tube with the spare tire lock key if equipped and jack handle WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS On vehicles equipped with single rear wheels retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque at 100 miles 160 km after any wheel disturbance tire rotation changing a flat tire wheel removal etc On vehicles equipped with dual rear wheels retighten the wheel lug nuts to the specified torque at 100 miles 160 km and again at 500 miles 800 km of new vehicle operation and after any wheel disturbance tire rotation changing a flat tire wheel remov
120. c with RSC system is an indication that at least some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road this could reduce the operator s ability to control the vehicle potentially resulting in a loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death If your AdvanceTrac with RSC system activates SLOW DOWN 198 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving WARNING If a failure has been detected within the AdvanceTrac with RSC system the sliding car icon n will illuminate steadily Verify that the AdvanceTrac with RSC system is not manually disabled push the AdvanceTrac with RSC Off button located on the center of the instrument panel If the sliding car icon n still illuminates steadily have the system service by an authorized dealer immediately Operating your vehicle with AdvanceTrac with RSC disabled could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death The AdvanceTrac with RSC system provides the following stability enhancement features for certain driving situations e Traction Control TCS which functions to help avoid drive wheel spin and loss of traction e Electronic Stability Control ESC which functions to help avoid skids or lateral slides e Roll Stability Control RSC which functions to help avoid a vehicle roll over The AdvanceTrac with RSC9 system automatically enab
121. ccurate measurement after 2 000 miles 3 000 miles 3 000 km 5 000 km Filling the tank The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Maintenance product specifications and capacities section of this chapter The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the empty reserve combined Indicated capacity is the difference in the amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should not be relied upon to increase driving range When refueling your vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty you might not be able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank For consistent results when filling the fuel tank e Turn the engine ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running 288 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications e Use the same filling rate setting low medium high each time the tank is filled e Allow no more than two automatic click offs when filling e Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating e Use a known qua
122. cement and your friend home In metric units the calculation would be 635 kg 2 x 99 kg 9 x 45 kg 635 198 405 32 kg The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance Certification Label found on the edge of the driver s door Special loading instructions for owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles WARNING For important information regarding safe operation of this type of vehicle see the Preparing to drive your vehicle section in the Driving chapter of this Owner s Guide WARNING Loaded vehicles may handle differently than unloaded vehicles Extra precautions such as slower speeds and increased stopping distance should be taken when driving a heavily loaded vehicle Your vehicle can haul more cargo and people than most passenger cars Depending upon the type and placement of the load hauling cargo and people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle 173 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading TRAILER TOWING Refer to 6 0 and 6 4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner s Guide Supplement for Diesel engine towing information Your vehicle may tow a class I II or III trailer provided the maximum trailer weight is less than or equal to the maximum trailer weight listed
123. ck the emission control system during normal driving A complete check may take several days If the vehicle is not ready for I M testing the following driving cycle consisting of mixed city and highway driving may be performed 15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway highway followed by 20 minutes of stop and go driving with at least four 30 second idle periods Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the engine Then start the engine and complete the above driving cycle The engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature Once started do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete If the vehicle is still not ready for I M testing the above driving cycle will have to be repeated POWER STEERING FLUID Check the power steering fluid Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the service interval schedules CE Check the fluid level when it is at ambient temperature 20 80 F 7 25 C 1 Check the fluid level on the dipstick It should be between the arrows in the FULL COLD range Do not add fluid if the level is within this range 294 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 2 If the fluid level is low start the engine 3 While the engine idles turn the steering wheel left and right several times 4 Turn the engine off WARNING For E 350 and
124. commendations for proper and safe operation e For your safety use an outdoor extension cord that is product certified by Underwriter s Laboratory UL or Canadian Standards Association CSA Use only an extension cord that can be used outdoors in cold temperatures and is clearly marked Suitable for Use with Outdoor Appliances Never use an indoor extension cord outdoors it could result in an electric shock or fire hazard e Use a 16 gauge outdoor extension cord minimum e Use as short an extension cord as possible e Do not use multiple extension cords Instead use one extension cord which is long enough to reach from the engine block heater cord to the outlet without stretching e Make certain that the extension cord is in excellent condition not patched or spliced Store your extension cord indoors at temperatures above 32 F 0 C Outdoor conditions can deteriorate extension cords over a period of time e To reduce the risk of electrical shock do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged cheater adapters Also ensure that the block heater especially the cord is in good condition before use e Make sure that when in operation the extension cord plug engine block heater cord plug connection is free and clear of water in order to prevent possible shock or fire e Be sure that areas where the vehicle is parked are clean and clear of all combustibles such as petroleum products dust rags paper
125. complements this book By referring to the market unique supplement if provided you can properly identify those features recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle This Owner s Guide is written primarily for the U S and Canadian Markets Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built for Export Refer to this Owner s Guide for all other required information and warnings 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle Vehicle Symbol Glossary Safety Alert N Fasten Safety Belt r Airbag Side A Child Seat Tether on il Anchor Anti Lock Brake System Brake Fluid Non Petroleum Based Stability Control System n sy Master Lighting Switch G S Fog Lamps Front ZD Fuel Pump Reset E Windshield Su Defrost Demist 10 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus See Owner s Guide Airbag Front Child Seat Lower Anchor Brake System Parking Brake System Parking Aid System Speed Control Hazard Warning Flasher Fuse Compartment Windshield Wash Wipe Rear Window Defrost Demist Aud Y gt J 2 OOG ous oe 2 Introduction Vehicle Symbol Glossary Power Yindowa AB Power Window Lockout BAY Front Rear Child Safety Door Interior Luggage Lock Unlock Compartment Release Panic Alarm Engine Oil A Engine Coo
126. covering over the upper structure of the seatback Properly adjust the seatback to an upright driving riding position so that the head restraint is positioned as close as possible to the back of your head 90 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Adjusting the front manual seat if equipped WARNING Never adjust the driver s seat or seatback when the vehicle is moving WARNING Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips Lift handle to move seat forward or backward Pull lever up to adjust seatback WARNING Before returning the seatback to its original position make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback After returning the seatback to its original position pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched An unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus 91 Seating and Safety Restraints Using the manual lumbar support if equipped The lumbar support control is located on the inboard side of the A driver s seat Turn the lumbar support control I clockwise to increase firmness Turn the lumbar support control counterclockwise to increase N softness gt Adjusting the front power seat if equipped The control is located on the outboard side of the
127. ctivation Airbags are designed to inflate in frontal and near frontal collisions not rollover side impact or rear impacts unless the collision causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon activation After airbag deployment it is normal to notice a smoke like powdery residue or smell the burnt propellant This may consist of cornstarch talcum powder or sodium compounds which may irritate the skin and eyes but none of the residue is toxic While the SRS is designed to help reduce serious injuries contact with a deploying airbag may also cause abrasions swelling or temporary hearing loss Because airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures facial and eye injuries or internal injuries particularly to occupants who are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of airbag deployment It is extremely important that occupants be properly restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control 110 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The SRS consists of e driver and passenger airbag modules which include the inflators and airbags e one or more impact and safing sensors e safety belt pretensioners e a readiness light and tone e a diagnostic module e and the electrical w
128. d check the coolant concentration refer to Checking engine coolant If the concentration is not 50 50 protection to 34 F 36 C drain some coolant and adjust the concentration It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50 50 coolant concentration Whenever coolant has been added the coolant level in the coolant reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle If necessary add enough 50 50 concentration of engine coolant and distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level If you have to add more than 1 0 quart 1 0 liter of engine coolant per month have your authorized dealer check the engine cooling system 278 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Your cooling system may have a leak Operating an engine with a low level of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine damage Recycled engine coolant Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine coolant in vehicles originally equipped with Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant since a Ford approved recycling process is not yet available Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate manner Follow your community s regulations and standards for recycling and disposing of automotive fluids Coolant refill capacity To find out how much fluid your vehicle s cooling system can hold refer to Maintenance product specifications
129. d the traction control active light will illuminate steadily in the instrument cluster the Traction Control button will not turn the system on or off and your vehicle should be serviced by an authorized dealer ADVANCETRAC WITH ROLL STABILITY CONTROL RSC STABILITY ENHANCEMENT SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED WARNING Vehicle modifications involving braking system aftermarket roof racks suspension steering system tire construction and or wheel tire size may change the handling characteristics of the vehicle and may adversely affect the performance of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system In addition installing any stereo loudspeakers may interfere with and adversely affect the AdvanceTrac with RSC system Install any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker as far as possible from the front center console the tunnel and the front seats in order to minimize the risk of interfering with the AdvanceTrac with RSC sensors Reducing the effectiveness of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death WARNING Remember that even advanced technology cannot defy the laws of physics It s always possible to lose control of a vehicle due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions Aggressive driving on any road condition can cause you to lose control of your vehicle increasing the risk of personal injury or property damage Activation of the AdvanceTra
130. d sharp turns excessive speed and abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death REVERSE SENSING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The Reverse Sensing System RSS sounds a tone to warn the driver of obstacles near the rear bumper when the R Reverse is selected and the vehicle is moving at speeds less than 3 mph 5 km h The system is not effective at speeds above 3 mph 5 km h and may not detect certain angular or moving objects 214 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving WARNING To help avoid personal injury please read and understand the limitations of the reverse sensing system as contained in this section Reverse sensing is only an aid for some generally large and fixed objects when moving in reverse on a flat surface at parking speeds Inclement weather may also affect the function of the RSS this may include reduced performance or a false activation WARNING To help avoid personal injury always use caution when in reverse and when using the RSS WARNING This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects The system is designed to provide a warning to assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to avoid damaging the vehicle The system may not detect smaller objects particularly those close to the ground WARNING Certain add on devic
131. d with auxiliary A C auxiliary airflow will be from the rear headliner vents NORM A C Uses outside air to cool the vehicle Air flows from the instrument panel vents only If equipped with auxiliary A C auxiliary airflow will be from the rear headliner vents VENT Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents OFF Outside air is shut out and the climate system is turned off FLR Distributes outside air through the floor vents If equipped with rear auxiliary heater or A C auxiliary airflow will be from the rear floor vents MIX Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and floor vents If equipped with rear auxiliary heater or A C auxiliary airflow will be from the rear floor vents WW Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents If equipped with rear auxiliary heater or A C auxiliary airflow will be from the rear floor vents 2 Temperature selection Operating tips e To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather place the air flow selector in the G7 position To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle do not drive with the air flow selector in the OFF position e Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the airflow to the back seats e Remove any snow ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield 43 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls D
132. dlamps so no light hits the wall 4 On the wall or screen you will observe a light pattern with a distinct horizontal edge towards the right If this edge is not at the horizontal reference line the beam will need to be adjusted so the edge is at the same height as the horizontal reference line 77755 PILZ 48 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights b Locate the vertical adjuster on the back of each headlamp then use a long Phillips 2 screwdriver to turn the adjuster either counterclockwise to adjust down or clockwise to adjust up aligning the upper edge of the light pattern up to the horizontal line 6 Repeat step 3 5 for the other headlamp 7 Close the hood and turn off the lamps TURN SIGNAL CONTROL 4 e Push down to activate the left turn signal e Push up to activate the right turn 4 signal INTERIOR LAMPS Dome lamps with rear headliner Dome lamps equipped with an ON OFF DOOR control will light when tt e doors are closed and the control is in the ON position Gap e control is in the DOOR position ee and any door is open e headlamp control is rotated fully counterclockwise When the control is in the OFF position it will not illuminate when you open the doors or fully rotate the headlamp control 49 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights Cargo lamps The dome
133. door to open the storage compartment The storage compartment may be used to secure sunglasses or a similar object Installing a garage door opener if equipped The storage compartment can be converted to accommodate a variety of aftermarket garage door openers 1 Place VELCRO hook onto side of aftermarket transmitter opposite of actuator control 2 Place the transmitter into storage compartment control down 3 Place the provided height adaptors onto the back of the GARAGE control as needed 4 Press the GARAGE control to activate the transmitter 59 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Electronic compass temperature display if equipped Outside air temperature The outside temperature display is contained in the overhead console The temperature display can be turned off and on by pressing the SELECT control on the overhead console The temperature can be displayed in Centigrade or Fahrenheit by pressing the SELECT control If the outside temperature falls below 38 F 8 C the display will alternate from ICE to the outside temperature at a two second rate for one minute Compass The compass display is contained in the overhead console The vehicle heading is displayed as one of N NE E SE S SW W and NW The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large buildings bridges power lines and powerful broadcast antenna Magnet
134. e the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload WARNING The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can be limited either by volume capacity how much space is available or by payload capacity how much weight the vehicle should carry Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle do not add more cargo even if there is space available Overloading or improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover 168 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Example only CARGO Cargo Weight Tires Wheels and Loading TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION SEATING CAPACITY TOTALS FRONT2 REAR3 The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs o 7 MANUAL FOR 200 KPA 29 PS ADDITIONAL 7145 8016 420 KPA 60PS _ INFORMATION P225 60R17 200 KPA 29 PSI XXX XX2000CXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX TIRE AND LOAD INFORMATION RENSEIGNEMENTS RELATIFS AUX PNEUS ET LA CHARGE SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL x FRONT xx REAR X NOMBRE DE PLACES TOTAL AVANT ARRI RE The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg La charge du v hicule occupants et bagages ne doit jamais d passer XXX Ibs LT225 75R 16 5E 200 KPA 29 PSI LT225 75R 16 5E 200 KPA 29 PSI T145 80016 420 KPA 60 PSI JAS P225 60R17 200 KPA 29 PSI XXX
135. e Loading in this chapter for more information Overview To provide the vehicle s load carrying capability some trucks require different recommended tire pressures in the front tires as compared to the rear tires The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS equipped on these vehicles is designed to illuminate the Low Tire Pressure Warning indicator at two different pressures one for the front tires and one for the rear tires Since tires need to be rotated to provide consistent performance and maximum tire life the Tire Pressure Monitoring System needs to know when the tires are rotated to determine which set of tires are on the front and which are on the rear With this information the system can detect and properly warn of low tire pressures WARNING Always perform the TPMS reset procedure after tire rotation when recommended pressures are different for the front and rear tires TPMS reset tool A special TPMS reset tool to reset your TPMS after tire rotation is provided with vehicles that have different front and rear tire pressures The tool is located with your Owner s Guide materials 161 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Please take the tool with the provided Velcro strip on the back and mount it in the bottom right corner of your Owner s Guide case as shown for safe keeping Ji e Fi If you find that the reset tool was not provided when
136. e arrow pointing away from the rim as it may not activate the sensor 9 Press and release the green button and hold the tool to the tire sidewall until the horn sounds The red light on the TPMS reset tool will illuminate while the tool is active The horn will sound once within 10 seconds to indicate the process was successful Note e If a double horn chirp is heard repeat the procedure If a single horn chirp is not heard move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least a l4 turn and repeat the procedure starting with Step 1 If a double horn chirp is heard even after the wheels were repositioned contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible 165 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading 10 Perform Steps 8 and 9 on the right front tire right rear tire and finally the left rear tire Training is complete after the horn sounds for the last tire trained left rear tire and the message center displays TRAINING COMPLETE Turn the ignition to off If two short horn beeps are heard the reset procedure was unsuccessful and must be repeated If after repeating the procedure and two short beeps are heard when the ignition is turned to off contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS WARNING Snow tires must be the same size load index speed rating as those originally provided by Ford Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect th
137. e ignition is in the on position the indicator will glow for three seconds to indicate the engine is enabled Automatic arming The vehicle is armed immediately after switching the ignition to the off position 8 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Automatic disarming Switching the ignition to the on position with a coded key disarms the vehicle Replacement keys If your keys are lost or stolen and you don t have an extra coded key you will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer The key codes need to be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys will need to be programmed Replacing coded keys can be very costly Store an extra programmed key away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any inconveniences Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional spare or replacement keys Programming spare keys A maximum of eight keys can be coded to your vehicle Only SecuriLock keys can be used To program a coded key yourself you will need two previously programmed coded keys keys that already operate your vehicle s engine and the new unprogrammed key s readily accessible for timely implementation of each step in the procedure If two previously programmed coded keys are not available you must bring your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the spare coded key s programmed Please read and understand the entire procedure before you
138. e in motion and e the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph 20 km h for greater than two seconds 78 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security The autolock feature repeats when e any door is opened then closed while the ignition is in the on position and the vehicle speed is 9 mph 15 km h or lower and e the vehicle then attains a speed greater than 12 mph 20 km h for greater than two seconds Deactivating activating autolock feature Your vehicle comes with the autolock feature disabled there are two methods to enable disable this feature e Through your authorized dealer or e by using a power door unlock lock procedure or e by using the instrument cluster message center if equipped Refer to Message center in the Driver Controls chapter or by using the instrument cluster message center if equipped Power door lock switch autolock enable disable procedure Before starting ensure the ignition is in the off position and all vehicle doors are closed You must complete Steps 1 5 within 30 seconds or the procedure will have to be repeated If the procedure needs to be repeated wait a minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again 1 Place the key in the ignition and turn the ignition to the on position 2 Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times 3 Turn the ignition from the on position to the off position 4 Press the power door un
139. e on Audiophile radios only Press MENU repeatedly to access Press A IV to optimize sound for ALL SEATS DRIVERS SEAT or REAR SEATS Track Folder Mode Available only on MP3 discs in CD mode In Track Mode pressing SEEK gt will scroll through all tracks on the disc In Folder mode pressing SEEK will scroll only through tracks within the selected folder Press 4 FOLDER FOLDER p to access the previous next folder if available COMPRESS Compression Available only in CD MP3 mode Press MENU until COMPRESS ON OFF appears in the display Use A IV to toggle ON OFF When COMPRESS is ON the system will bring soft and loud CD passages together for a more consistent listening level 4 AUX Press repeatedly to cycle through LINE IN Auxiliary audio mw SATI SAT2 SATS Satellite radio modes if equipped To return to radio mode press AM FM For location and further information on the auxiliary audio mode refer to Auxiliary input jack later in this chapter Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 5 Seek In radio mode press P to access the seex S previous next strong station In CD mode press d o to access the previous next CD track 30 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems In satellite radio mode if equipped press SEEK SEEK P to seek to the previous next channel
140. e rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 172 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 e Traction The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C The grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance e Temperature The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel 13 Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure Indicates the tire manufacturers maximum permissible pressure and or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire This pressure is normally higher than the manufacturer s recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the vehicle label The tire suppliers may have additional markings notes or warnings such as standard load radial tubeless etc 153 2009 Econoline eco Owners
141. e safety and performance of your vehicle which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death Additionally the use of non recommended tires and wheels could cause steering suspension axle or transfer case power transfer unit failure The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in rain and snow However in some climates you may need to use snow tires and chains If you need to use chains it is recommended that steel wheels of the same size and specifications be used as chains may chip aluminum wheels Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains e Use only SAE Class S chains e Install chains securely verifying that the chains do not touch any wiring brake lines or fuel lines Drive cautiously If you hear the chains rub or bang against your vehicle stop and re tighten the chains If this does not work remove the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle If possible avoid fully loading your vehicle Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed Do not use tire chains on dry roads e The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle damage Do not remove these components from your vehicle when using snow tires and chains 166 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading VEHICLE LOADING WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER This section will guide you in the p
142. e use of reformulated cleaner burning gasolines to improve air quality per the recommendations in the Choosing the right fuel section Octane recommendations Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly However if it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel with the recommended octane rating see your authorized dealer to prevent any engine damage Unleaded Gasoline Engines Your vehicle is designed to use Regular unleaded gasoline with a pump R M 2 octane rating of 87 We do not recommend the use of gasolines labeled as Regular in high altitude areas that are sold with octane ratings less than 87 FFV engine Your vehicle is designed to use Fuel Ethanol Ed 75 Ed85 Regular unleaded gasoline or any mixture of the two fuels Use of other fuels such as Fuel Methanol may cause powertrain damage a loss of vehicle performance and your warranty may be invalidated 286 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Fuel quality Do not add aftermarket fuel additive products to your fuel tank It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane rating These products have not been approved for your engine and could cause damage to the fuel system Repairs to correct the effects of using an aftermarket product in your fuel may n
143. e vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery performance and durability 272 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an extended period of time This will minimize the discharge of your battery during storage WARNING Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause personal injury Therefore do not allow flames sparks or lighted substances to come near the battery When working near the battery always shield your face and protect your eyes Always provide proper ventilation WARNING When lifting a plastic cased battery excessive pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps resulting in personal injury and or damage to the vehicle or battery Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners WARNING Keep batteries out of reach of children Batteries contain sulfuric acid Avoid contact with skin eyes or clothing Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of acid solution In case of acid contact with skin or eyes flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention If acid is swallowed call a physician immediately WARNING Battery posts terminals and related accessories con
144. ed chassis models To remove the spare tire 1 Open the rear doors and remove the thumb screw and anti theft N bracket If finger pressure will not remove the thumb screw use the e S lug wrench to loosen the screw Lt em 2 Remove the access plug under a the left door 235 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 3 Remove the jack handle from the right side compartment and insert the tip of the jack handle through the access hole and into the tube 4 Turn the jack handle counterclockwise until the cable is slack and the tire can be slid from under the vehicle 5 Remove the retainer from the spare tire To stow the cable retainer with the spare removed turn the jack handle clockwise until all slack is removed Tire change procedure WARNING To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire be sure the parking brake is set then block in both directions the wheel that is diagonally opposite other side and end of the vehicle to the tire being changed WARNING If the vehicle slips off the jack you or someone else could be seriously injured WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel 1 Block the wheel that is diagonally opposite the tire you are changing On E 450 vehicles the pa
145. ed to inflate in rear and side crashes or rollovers Td rather be thrown clear People who are ejected are 40 times more likely to DIE Safety belts help prevent ejection WE CAN T PICK OUR CRASH WARNING Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt or insert a latchplate into the buckle to avoid the Belt Minder chime To do so may adversely affect the performance of the vehicle s air bag system One time disable Any time the safety belt is buckled and then unbuckled during an ignition on cycle the Belt Minder will be disabled for that ignition cycle only 105 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Deactivating activating the Belt Minder feature Read Steps 1 5 thoroughly before proceeding with the deactivation activation programming procedure The Belt Minder feature can be deactivated activated by performing the following procedure Before following the procedure make sure that e the parking brake is set e the gearshift is in P Park e the ignition switch is in the off position e all vehicle doors and the hood are closed e the driver s safety belt is unbuckled e the parklamps headlamps are in the off position WARNING While the design allows you to deactivate your Belt Minder this system is designed to improve your chances of being safely belted and surviving an accident We recommend you leave the Belt Minder system activated for y
146. efer to Brake shift interlock in the Driving chapter for specific instructions if you cannot move the gear shift lever into N Neutral e Maximum speed is not to exceed 35 mph 56 km h e Maximum distance is 50 miles 80 km 249 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be performed by an authorized Ford Lincoln or Mercury dealer While any authorized dealer handling your vehicle line will provide warranty service we recommend you return to your selling authorized dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training and or equipment so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform all warranty repairs This means that depending on the warranty repair needed you may have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your vehicle to the authorized dealer Repairs will be made using Ford or Motorcraft parts or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized by Ford Away from home If you are away from home when your vehicle needs service contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center or use the online resources listed below to find the nearest authorized dealer In the United States Mailing Address Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center P O Box 6248
147. egative terminal of the battery to be jumped A spark may cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery 5 Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades belts moving parts of both engines or any fuel delivery system parts Jump starting 1 Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at moderately increased speed 2 Start the engine of the disabled vehicle 3 Once the disabled vehicle has been started run both engines for an additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables 245 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Removing the jumper cables Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were connected 1 Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface Note In the illustrations lightning bolts are used to designate the assisting boosting battery 2 Remove the jumper cable on the negative connection of the booster vehicle s battery 246 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 3 Remove the jumper cable from the positive terminal of the booster vehicle s battery 4 Remove the jumper cable from the positive terminal of the disabled vehicle s battery After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables removed allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can relearn its idle conditions 247
148. ehicle please have the following information available when contacting the Motorhome Customer Assistance Center e telephone number where you can be reached e vehicle location city and state e year and make of your vehicle e date of vehicle purchase 251 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance e current odometer reading e vehicle identification number VIN Additional Assistance If you have questions or concerns or are unsatisfied with the service you are receiving follow these steps 1 Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your selling servicing authorized dealer 2 If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved contact the Sales Manager Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager 3 If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company policies please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center In order to help you serve you better please have the following information available when contacting a Customer Relationship Center Vehicle Identification Number VIN Your telephone number home and business e The name of the authorized dealer and city where located e The vehicle s current odometer reading In some states you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing remedies under your state s warranty laws Ford is also allowed a final repair attempt in some states In the United States a warranty dispute must be submitted
149. en the brakes have cooled down the system will regain all features Anti lock braking RSC and ESC are not affected by this condition and will continue to function during the cool down period The Engine Traction Control and Brake Traction Control system may be deactivated in certain situations See the Switching Off AdvanceTrac with RSC9 section following 200 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Electronic Stability Control ESC Electronic Stability Control ESC may enhance your vehicle s directional stability during adverse maneuvers for example when cornering severely or avoiding objects in the roadway ESC operates by applying brakes to one or more of the wheels individually and if necessary reducing engine power if the system detects that the vehicle is about to skid or slide laterally During Electronic Stability Control events the sliding car icon n in the instrument cluster will flash Certain adverse driving maneuvers may activate the Electronic Stability Control system which include but are not limited to e Taking a turn too fast e Maneuvering quickly to avoid an accident pedestrian or obstacle e Driving over a patch of ice or other slippery surfaces e Changing lanes on a snow rutted road Entering a snow free road from a snow covered side street or vice versa Entering a paved road from a gravel road or vice versa Cornering while towing a heavily loaded trailer refer to T
150. enance schedule and owner maintenance checks found in scheduled maintenance information Conditions Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy at any speed Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy approximately 1 mpg 0 4 km L is lost for every 400 Ib 180 kg of weight carried Adding certain accessories to your vehicle for example bug deflectors rollbars light bars running boards ski luggage racks may reduce fuel economy Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy 290 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications e Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first 8 10 miles 12 16 km of driving e Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to driving on hilly terrain e Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal e Close windows for high speed driving EPA fuel economy estimates Every new vehicle should have a window sticker containing EPA fuel economy estimates Contact your authorized dealer if the window sticker is not supplied with your vehicle The EPA fuel economy estimates should be your guide for the fuel economy comparisons with other vehicles Your fuel economy may vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions Note Vehicles over 8 500 GVW Gross Vehicle Weight will not ha
151. ently Keep body and door drain holes free from packed dirt 263 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning FORD AND LINCOLN MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS Your Ford or Lincoln Mercury authorized dealer has many quality products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes These quality products have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs they are custom designed to complement the style and appearance of your vehicle Each product is made from high quality materials that meet or exceed rigid specifications For best results use the following products or products of equivalent quality Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 Motorcraft Car Wash Canada only CXC 83 Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner ZC 15 Motorcraft Custom Clear Coat Polish ZC 8 A Motorcraft Custom Vinyl Protectant ZC 40 A Motorcraft Dash and Vinyl Cleaner ZC 38 A Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner U S only ZC 11 A Motorcraft Leather Care Kit U S only ZC 11 D Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A Motorcraft Dusting Cloth ZC 24 Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser U S only ZC 20 Motorcraft Engine Shampoo Canada only CXC 66 A Motorcraft Multi Purpose Cleaner Canada only CXC 101 Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner Canada only CXC 100 Motorcraft Premium Liquid Wax ZC 53 A Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate U S only ZC 32 A Motorcraft Profe
152. equipped with a cover or a cap plug is located on the instrument panel A second power point if equipped is located behind the driver s seat on the upper trim panel A third power point if equipped is located in the glove box Do not use the power point for operating the cigarette lighter element if equipped 61 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls To prevent the fuse from being blown do not use the power point s over the vehicle capacity of 12 VDC 180W If the power point or cigar lighter socket is not working a fuse may have blown Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter for information on checking and replacing fuses To have full capacity usage of your power point the engine is required to be running to avoid unintentional discharge of the battery To prevent the battery from being discharged e do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is not running e do not leave battery chargers video game adapters computers and other devices plugged in overnight or when the vehicle is parked for extended periods Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used Cigar Cigarette lighter if equipped Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigarette lighter socket Do not hold the lighter in with your hand while it is heating this will damage the lighter element and socket The lighter will be released f
153. es Wheels and Loading GCWR Gross Combined Weight Rating Trailer Weights Rear Maximum Maximum ie Loaded frontal Reo Tatio Trailer Weight trailer ft lb kg m E 450 Stripped Chassis 158 wheelbase dual rear wheel 14050 GVWR 14050 E 450 Stripped Chassis 176 wheelbase dual rear wheel 14050 GVWR 14050 E 450 Stripped Chassis 158 wheelbase dual rear wheel 14500 GVWR 20000 E 450 Stripped Chassis 176 wheelbase dual rear wheel 14500 GVWR 20000 Maximum trailer weight for all cutaway E 350 and E 450 vehicles must be calculated by subtracting the weight of the vehicle including incomplete vehicle weight and payload which includes second unit body weight cargo and passengers from the GCW Otherwise maximum trailer weight is 10 000 Ib 4 536 kg For high altitude operation reduce GCWR by 2 per 1 000 ft 300 meters elevation To determine the maximum trailer weight designed for your particular vehicle as equipped follow the section Vehicle loading earlier in this chapter Your vehicle s load capacity is designated by weight not by volume so you cannot necessarily use all available space when loading a vehicle Distribute the load so that only 10 1596 of the total is on the tongue Tie down the load so that it does not shift and change the weight on the hitch 182 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Towing a trailer
154. es additional text to be displayed When the gt indicator is active press SEEK P to view the additional display text When the lt indicator is active press E SEEK to view the previous display text Press and hold to hear a brief sampling of the next channels Press again to stop In CATEGORY MODE press SCAN to hear a brief sampling of channels in the selected category Press again to stop Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 32 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 14 AM FM Press to select AM FM1 FM2 frequency band 15 ON OFF Volume Press to turn ON OFF Turn to increase decrease volume b Note If the volume is set above a VOL PUSH certain level and the ignition is turned off the volume will come back on at a nominal listening level when the ignition switch is turned back on 16 CD Press to enter CD MP3 mode If a CD is already loaded into the system CD MP3 play will begin where it ended last 17 LOAD To load a disc into the system press LOAD Select a slot number using memory presets 1 6 When the display reads LOAD CD load the desired disc label side up If you do not choose a slot within five seconds the system will choose for you Once loaded the first track will begin to play To auto load up to six discs press and hold LOAD until the displa
155. es and seek medical attention Failure to seek proper medical attention could lead to permanent injury Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin If fuel is splashed on the skin and or clothing promptly remove contaminated clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water Repeated or prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation Be particularly careful if you are taking Antabuse or other forms of disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism Breathing gasoline and or ethanol vapors or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction In sensitive individuals serious personal injury or sickness may result If fuel is splashed on the skin promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and water Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse reaction 282 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications FFV fuel tanks may contain zero to 85 percent ethanol Any fuel blends containing gasoline and ethanol should be treated the same as Fuel Ethanol To identify if your vehicle is an FFV it may be equipped with a yellow fuel cap with the text E85 Gasoline or check if there is a label on the fuel filler door Pure ethanol is the alcohol which is the intoxicating agent in liquor beer and wine It is distilled from the fermentation of plants such as field corn and sugar cane When ethanol is produced for use in motor fuels a small amount of
156. es such as large trailer hitches bike or surfboard racks and any device that may block the normal detection zone of the RSS system may create false beeps 215 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving The RSS detects obstacles up to 6 feet 2 meters from the rear bumper with a decreased coverage area at the outer corners of the bumper refer to the figures for approximate zone coverage areas As you move closer to the obstacle the rate of the tone increases When the obstacle is less than 10 inches 25 0 cm away the tone will sound continuously If the RSS detects a stationary or receding object further than 10 inches 25 0 cm from the side of the vehicle the tone will sound for only three seconds Once the system detects an object approaching the tone will sound again While receiving a warning on some radios the volume will be reduced to a predetermined level After the warning goes away the radio will return to the previous value The RSS automatically turns on when the gear selector is placed in R Reverse and the ignition is on A control in the message center allows the driver to disable the system only when the ignition is on and the gear selector is in R Reverse Refer to Message center in the Driver Controls chapter for more information Keep the RSS sensors located on the rear bumper fascia free from snow ice and large accumulations of dirt do not clean the sensors w
157. faces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance 138 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature A B C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 139 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure TIRES Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service but they must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them Glossary of t
158. fety belts For more information on safety belts and their proper usage refer to the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter 2 Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off e Make sure the parking brake is set e Make sure the gearshift is in P Park I P RNO21 ESE aan 191 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving e Turn the key to 4 on without turning the key to 5 start O 4 c nu y Some warning lights will briefly illuminate See Warning lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information regarding the warning lights Starting the engine 1 Turn the key to 4 on without turning the key to 5 start a 2 Turn the key to 5 start then 3 release the key as soon as the engine starts Excessive cranking could damage the starter M x Note If the engine does not start within five seconds on the first try turn the key to 3 off wait 10 seconds and try again If the engine still fails to start press the accelerator to the floor and try again this will allow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off in case the engine is flooded with fuel Cold weather starting flexible fuel vehicles only The starting characteristics of all grades of Eg ethanol make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0 F 18 C Consult your fuel distributor for the availability of winter grade ethanol As the outside temperatu
159. for the best fuel economy The overdrive function allows automatic upshifts and downshifts through gears one through five D Overdrive with Tow Haul ON The Tow Haul feature improves transmission operation when towing a trailer or a heavy load All transmission gear ranges are available when using Tow Haul To activate Tow Haul press the button on the end of the gearshift H lever The TOW HAUL indicator light will TOW illuminate in the instrument cluster HAUL Tow Haul delays upshifts to reduce frequency of transmission shifting Tow Haul also provides engine braking in all forward gears when the 210 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving transmission is in the D Overdrive position this engine braking will slow the vehicle and assist the driver in controlling the vehicle when descending a grade Depending on driving conditions and load conditions the transmission may downshift slow the vehicle and control the vehicle speed when descending a hill without the accelerator pedal being pressed The amount of downshift braking provided will vary based upon the amount the brake pedal is depressed To deactivate the Tow Haul feature and return to normal driving mode press the button on the end of the gearshift lever The TOW HAUL light will no longer be illuminated When you shut off and restart the engine the transmission will automatically return to normal D Overdrive mode Tow Hau
160. for your engine and rear axle ratio on the following charts GCWR Gross Combined Weight Rating Trailer Weights A Maximum Maximum ind A Loaded frontal aon d io Trailer Weight S ub ft Ib kg m E 150 Regular RV Van 8520 GVWR 11500 4S 9m Gory 90mm mes 12000 pus Ee e E 150 Regular Wagon 7 8 Passenger 8520 GVWR 11500 5216 Fidi aid DM 12000 5443 ini cae SS E 150 Regular RV Van 8600 GVWR 13000 5897 IU eee 13000 5897 EUM di ads E 150 Extended Van 8600 GVWR 11500 5216 Miis iak 12000 oup OMM 0 174 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading GCWR Gross Combined Weight Rating Trailer Weights 3 Maximum Maximum Loaded frontal area of En B n 2 fato Trailer Weight trailer ft lb kg m E 150 Extended Van 8600 GVWR 13000 54 sm que ocn mes 13000 Qu eee E 150 Regular Wagon 7 8 Passenger 8600 GVWR 13000 Du peo 13000 pue uu e E 250 Regular RV Van 8900 GVWR 11500 5216 dela ee 12000 6443 pia PS E 250 Extended RV Van 8900 GVWR 11500 pup eee aa 12000 ei emen SIS E 250 Regular RV Van 9000 GVWR 13000 5896 ee age 13000 5896 eee ee E 250 Cutaway 138 wheelbase single rear wheel 8600 GVWR 12000 175 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading GCWR Gross Combined Weight Rating
161. ford com au e n Mexico www ford com mx Additional owner information is given in separate publications This Owner s Guide describes every option and model variant available and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your particular vehicle Furthermore due to printing cycles it may describe options before they are generally available Remember to pass on this Owner s Guide when reselling the vehicle It is an integral part of the vehicle WARNING Fuel pump shut off switch Diesel and Stripped Chassis vehicles only In the event of an accident the safety switch will automatically cut off the fuel supply to the engine The switch can also be activated through sudden vibration e g collision when parking To reset the switch refer to the Fuel pump shut off switch in the Roadside Emergencies chapter SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION A Warning symbols in this guide How can you reduce the risk of personal injury to yourself or others In this guide answers to such questions are contained in comments highlighted by the warning triangle symbol These comments should be read and observed 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction A Warning symbols on your vehicle When you see this symbol it is imperative that you consult the relevant section of this guide before L i touching or attempting adjustment of any kind Protecting the environment We must all play our part in pr
162. fuel economy readings 70 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Setup menu Press and hold the SELECT RESET stem to get into the SETUP MENU HOLD RESET FOR sequence from the INFO MENU for SETUP MENU the following displays e Reset to English Gf in another language see Note below e Units English Metric e Language e Autolock e Autounlock e Park Aid if equipped e Oil Life Reset and Start Value Note When returning to the SETUP menu and a non English HALB RESET FOR language has been selected HOLD 1 c RESET FOR ENGLISH will be ENGLISH displayed to change back to English Press and hold the SELECT RESET stem to change back to English Units English Metric 1 Select this function from the SETUP MENU for the current units UMTS to be displayed lt ENG gt METRIC 2 Press and hold the SELECT RESET stem to change from English to Metric 3 Press the SELECT RESET stem for the next SETUP MENU item or wait for more than four seconds to return to the INFO MENU Language Note When entering the SETUP MENU and a non English language LANGUAGE has been selected PRESS RESET FOR ENGLISH will be displayed to ENGLISH change back to English 1 Select this function from the SETUP MENU for the current language to be displayed 71 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls 2 Press and hold the SELE
163. fus Seating and Safety Restraints Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children d Recommended E Child size height weight or age restraint type Infants or Children weighing 40 Ib 18 kg or less Use a child safety toddlers generally age four or younger seat sometimes called an infant carrier convertible seat or toddler seat Small Children who have outgrown or no Usea children longer properly fit in a child safety belt positioning seat generally children who are less booster seat than 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall are greater than age four 4 and less than age twelve 12 and between 40 Ibs 18 kg and 80 Ibs 36 kg and upward to 100 Ibs 45 kg if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer Children who have outgrown or no Use a vehicle longer properly fit in a belt positioning safety belt having booster seat generally children who the lap belt snug are at least 4 feet 9 inches and low across 1 45 meters tall or greater than 80 Ib the hips shoulder 36 kg or 100 Ib 45 kg if belt centered recommended by child restraint across the manufacturer shoulder and chest and seatback upright e You are required by law to properly use safety seats for infants and toddlers in the U S and Canada Many states and provinces require that small children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight a height of 4 ft 9 in 1 45 meters tall or 80 Ib 36 kg Check your local
164. g surface Inspect discs before playing Clean only with an approved CD cleaner e Wipe discs from the center out Dont e Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods of time e Clean using a circular motion CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4 75 in 12 cm audio compact discs only Due to technical incompatibility certain recordable and re recordable compact discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players 36 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Do not use any irregular shaped CDs or discs with a scratch protection film attached Sf y P CDs with homemade paper adhesive labels should not be Or inserted into the CD player as the label may peel and cause the gt CD to become jammed It is recommended that homemade CDs be identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels Ballpoint pens may damage CDs Please contact your authorized dealer for further information Audio system warranty and service Refer to the Warranty Guide Customer Information Guide for audio system warranty information If service is necessary see your dealer or qualified technician MP3 track and folder structure Your MP3 system recognizes MP3 individual tracks and folder structure as follows e There are two different modes for MP3 disc playback MP3 track mode system default and MP3 folder m
165. g T Om with this light on may cause the mi Service Engine Soon warning light to come on refer to Fuel filler cap in the Maintenance and Specification chapter Brake system warning light To confirm the brake system warning 1 P light is functional it will momentarily illuminate when the B HAKE ignition is turned to the on position when the engine is not running or in a position between on and start or by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned to the on position If the brake system warning light does not illuminate at this time seek service immediately from your authorized dealer Illumination after releasing the parking brake indicates low brake fluid level and the brake system should be inspected immediately by your authorized dealer 18 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster WARNING Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning light on is dangerous A significant decrease in braking performance may occur It will take you longer to stop the vehicle Have the vehicle checked by your authorized dealer Driving extended distances with the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and the risk of personal injury continues to flash a malfunction has been detected have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer Normal braking is still functional unless the brake warning light also is illuminated Anti lock brake system If the AB
166. g light s 196 fluid checking and adding 295 fluid refill capacities 303 fluid specifications 303 lubricant specifications 303 Parking cote Re EN 196 shift interlock 205 ralen 3 2 eerie en 184 Bulbs occisi ar Fue ne 50 C Capacities for refilling fluids 303 Cell phone use es 9 Changing a tire 0 eee 232 Child safety seats 121 in front seat 121 I Tear Seab 5 eec es 121 LATCH 3eostiicceen decus nx 124 recommendations 119 tether anchorage hardware 127 Child safety seats booster SEALS E E 132 Cleaning your vehicle engine compartment 260 extet OT uis en V teas eur need 263 instrument panel 262 INTETT isccccssessseteseccssessoenestsess 262 plastic Darts uocis 261 safety belts sssss 262 WASHING ed niis 258 WAXING arepan AEE 259 A A E A E E A E 259 wiper blades 261 Climate control see Air conditioning or Heating 42 44 Clock adjust 6 CD in dash ou 28 AM FM Stereo 21 AM FM CD eeer 23 Compass electronic 60 calibration wo ee eee 61 set zone adjustment 60 Console overhead eeeeeeene 58 59 Controls power seat sei 92 Coolant checking and adding 275 refil
167. g to reset your radio stations when your vehicle battery has been disconnected The Adaptive Transmission Strategy allows the transmission to relearn these operating parameters This learning process could take several transmission upshifts and downshifts during this learning process slightly firmer shifts may occur After this learning process normal shift feel and shift scheduling will resume P Park This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from turning To put your vehicle in gear e Start the engine e Depress the brake pedal e Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear To put your vehicle in P Park e Come to a complete stop e Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P Park WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle R Reverse With the gearshift lever in R Reverse the vehicle will move backward Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R Reverse 212 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving N Neutral With the gearshift lever in N Neutral the vehicle can be started and is free to roll Hold the brake pedal down while in this position D Drive with Overdrive D Drive with Overdrive is the normal driving position for the best fuel economy The overdrive functi
168. ghest possible weight of a fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow It assumes a vehicle with only mandatory options no cargo internal or external a tongue load of 10 15 conventional trailer or king pin weight of 15 25 fifth wheel trailer and driver only 150 Ib 68 kg Consult your authorized dealer or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your authorized dealer for more detailed information Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King Pin Weight refers to the amount of the weight that a trailer pushes down on a trailer hitch Examples For a 5 000 Ib 2 268 kg conventional trailer multiply 5 000 by 0 10 and 0 15 to obtain a proper tongue load range of 500 to 750 Ib 227 to 340 kg For an 11 500 Ib 5 216 kg fifth wheel trailer multiply by 0 15 and 0 25 to obtain a proper king pin load range of 1 725 to 2 875 Ib 782 to 1 304 kg WARNING Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the Safety Compliance Certification Label 171 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading WARNING Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the original tires because they may lower the vehicles GVWR and GAWR limitations Replacement tires with a higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations WARNING Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in serious damage to the vehicle and or personal injury
169. gnificantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles 208 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving WARNING In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Utility vehicles and trucks have larger tires and increased ground clearance giving the vehicle a higher center of gravity than a passenger Car WARNING Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility vehicles and trucks handle differently than vehicles with a lower center of gravity Utility vehicles and trucks are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off road conditions Avoid sharp turns excessive speed or abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death WARNING Loaded vehicles with a higher center of gravity may handle differently than unloaded vehicles Do not overload your vehicle and use extra precautions such as driving at slower speeds avoiding abrupt steering changes and allowing for increased stopping distance when driving a heavily loaded vehicle Over loading or loading the vehicle improperly can deteriorate handling capability and contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover Vehicle stability and handling The
170. h the A C on put the vehicle in D Drive and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute 7 Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process e The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles 16 km or more to relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy along with the ethanol content for flexible fuel vehicles e f you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim the idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle trim is eventually relearned For flexible fuel vehicles if you are operating on E85 you may experience poor starts or an inability to start the engine and driveability problems until the fuel trim and ethanol content have been relearned If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed the clock and radio settings must be reset once the battery is reconnected 274 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications e Always dispose of automotive batteries in a responsible manner S Follow your local authorized Y A standards for disposal Call your t local authorized recycling center to find out more about recycling automotive batteries RECYCLE ENGINE COOLANT Checking engine coolant The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the intervals listed in scheduled maintenance information The coolant concentration should be maintained at 50 50 coolant and distilled water which equates
171. h this feature the radio and other electrical devices may be used for up to ten minutes after the ignition is turned off or until either front door is opened 22 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems LA W Tuner Press to manually go up or down the radio frequency Also use in menu mode to select various settings 2 Phone Pressing Phone results in NO PHONE message shown in display 3 MENU Press repeatedly to access the following settings Setting the clock Press MENU until SET HOURS or SET MINUTES is displayed Use A IV to manually increase decrease Press MENU again to disengage clock mode AUTOSET Press MENU until the display reads AUTOSET Autoset allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without losing your original manually set preset stations for AM FM1 FM2 Use A IV to turn on off When the six strongest stations are filled the station stored in preset 1 will begin playing If there are less than six strong stations the system will store the last one in the remaining presets RBDS Available only in FM mode This feature allows you to search RBDS equipped stations for a certain category of music format CLASSIC COUNTRY INFORM JAZZ RB ROCK etc To activate press MENU repeatedly until RBDS ON OFF appears in the display Use A IV to toggle RBDS ON OFF When RBDS is OFF you will not be able to search for RBDS equipped stations
172. hat stops the flow of fuel to the engine Not every impact will cause a shut off Should your vehicle shut off after a collision due to this feature you may restart your vehicle by doing the following 1 Turn the ignition switch to the off position 2 Turn the ignition switch to the on position In some instances the vehicle may not restart the first time you try to restart and may take one additional attempt WARNING Failure to inspect and if necessary repair fuel leaks after a collision may increase the risk of fire and serious injury Ford Motor Company recommends that the fuel system be inspected by an authorized dealer after any collision 224 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies FUSES AND RELAYS Fuses If electrical components in the vehicle are not working a fuse may have blown Blown fuses are identified by a broken wire within the fuse Check the appropriate 15 fuses before replacing any electrical components Note Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage rating Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a fire Standard fuse amperage rating and color Cartridge Fuse link maxi cartridge Hd pe Bue mue j qq o ox d 25A Natural Natural 404
173. he driver s door MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO DATE 12 01 GVWR XXXXLB XXXXKG FRONT GAWR XXXXLB XXXXKG FRONT GAWR XXXXLB XXXXKG WITH XXXXXXXXXXX TIRES WITH XXXXXXXXXXX TIRES XXXX XX RIMS XXXX XX RIMS AT XXXXkPa XX PSICOLD AT XXXXkPa XX PSI COLD THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTUER SHOWN ABOVE VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX TYPE XXX EXT PNT XX RC XX DSO XXXXX WB INTTR TP PS R AXLE TR SPR T XXXXX XXXXX XXX XX X XX X XXX XXXX 2000000C XX XX 311 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Vehicle identification number VIN The VIN is located on the driver side instrument panel or on the certification label It contains the following information 1 World manufacturer identifier XXX X XXX X X X X XXXXXX 2 Brake system Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Restraint System 3 Vehicle line series body type 4 Engine type b Check digit 6 Model year 7 Assembly plant 8 Production sequence number Certification label for incomplete vehicles On completed derivations of incomplete vehicles the certification label is affixed at a location determined by a subsequent stage manufacturer of the completed vehicle In these cases the completed vehicle is manufactured in two or more stages by two or more separate manufacturers 312 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1
174. he engine compartment in this chapter for the location of the dipstick 6 Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube 7 Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level The fluid should be in the designated area for normal operating temperature or ambient temperature 296 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Low fluid level Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid level is at the bottom of the dipstick and the ambient temperature is above 50 F 10 C pe Correct fluid level The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating temperature 150 F 170 F 66 C 77 C on a level surface The normal operating temperature can be reached after approximately 20 miles 30 km of driving You can check the fluid without driving if the ambient temperature is above 50 F 10 C However if fluid is added at this time an overfill condition could result when the vehicle reaches normal operating temperature 297 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications OMS D The transmission fluid should be in this range if at normal operating temperature 150 F 170 F 66 C 77 C The transmission fluid should be in this range if at ambient temperature 50 F 95 F 10 C 35 C 298 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printi
175. he pressure in your tire s 1 Make sure the tires are cool meaning they are not hot from driving even a mile If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot i e driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km never bleed or reduce air pressure The tires are hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above recommended cold pressures A hot tire at or below recommended cold inflation pressure could be significantly under inflated Note If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire s check and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure when you get to the pump It is normal for tires to heat up and the air pressure inside to go up as you drive 2 Remove the cap from the valve on one tire then firmly press the tire gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure with the tire gauge 3 Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure Note If you overfill the tire release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the valve Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge 4 Replace the valve cap 141 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading 5 Repeat this procedure for each tire including the spare Note Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the other tires For T type mini spare tires see Dissimilar Spare Tire Wheel Information section for description Store and maintain at 60 psi 4 1
176. he vehicle refer to Starting the engine in this chapter WARNING Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system creating the risk of fire or other damage WARNING Do not park idle or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system which can start a fire 190 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving WARNING Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed areas Exhaust fumes can be toxic Always open the garage door before you start the engine See Guarding against exhaust fumes in this chapter for more instructions WARNING If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes Important safety precautions When the engine starts the idle RPM runs faster to warm the engine If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically have the vehicle checked If your vehicle is operated in a heavy snow storm or blowing snow conditions the engine air induction may become partially clogged with snow and or ice If this occurs the engine may experience a significant reduction in power output At the earliest opportunity clear all the snow and or ice away from the air induction inlet Before starting the vehicle 1 Make sure all occupants buckle their sa
177. he vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire wheel The usage of a full size dissimilar spare tire wheel can lead to impairment of the following e Handling stability and braking performance e Comfort and noise e Ground clearance and parking at curbs e Winter weather driving capability e Wet weather driving capability e All Wheel driving capability if applicable e Load leveling adjustment if applicable When driving with the full size dissimilar spare tire wheel additional caution should be given to e Towing a trailer e Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body e Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack Drive cautiously when using a full size dissimilar spare tire wheel and seek service as soon as possible 234 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Full size Matching Spare Tire Wheel Information This spare tire wheel will match the road tire wheel When driving with the full size matching spare tire wheel do not exceed 70 mph 113 km h It is intended for temporary use only This means if you need to use it you should replace it as soon as possible Stopping and securing your vehicle 1 Park on a level surface 2 Activate the warning flashers 3 Place the gearshift in P Park 4 Apply the parking brake and turn the engine off Spare tire information The spare tire for your vehicle is stowed under the rear of your vehicle except cutaway and stripp
178. hicle move the passenger seat as far back from the instrument panel as possible WARNING Because the last row of seats in the 12 passenger and 15 passenger configuration is not equipped with LATCH anchors and is spaced closer to the row of seats in front Do not use forward facing or rear facing child seats other than belt positioning boosters in the last row Many forward facing child safety seats include a tether strap which extends from the back of the child safety seat and hooks to an anchoring point called the top tether anchor Tether straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats Contact the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a tether strap or to obtain a longer tether strap if the tether strap on your safety seat does not reach the appropriate top tether anchor in the vehicle The rear seats of your vehicle are equipped with built in tether strap anchors located behind the seats as described below Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as shown The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other than the correct tether anchor 127 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Once the child safety seat has been installed using either the safety belt the lower anchors of the LATCH system or both you can attach the top tether strap Perform the following steps to install a child safety seat w
179. hild safety seat with combination lap shoulder belts e Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position e Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap and feel it latch Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle e Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety seat with the tongue between the child seat and the release button to prevent accidental unbuckling Place vehicle seat back in upright position e Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode Refer to step 5 below Perform the following steps when installing the child seat with combination lap shoulder belts Note Although the child seat illustrated is a forward facing child seat the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child seat 1 Position the child safety seat in a seat with a combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Pull down on the shoulder belt and then grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt together 122 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 3 While holding the shoulder and lap belt portions together route the tongue through the child seat according to the child seat manufacturer s instructions Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted 4 nsert the belt tongue into the proper buckle the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from for that seating position until you hear a snap and feel the
180. ic or metallic objects placed in or on the vehicle may also affect compass accuracy Adjustments may need to be made to the zone and calibration of the compass Compass zone adjustment 1 Determine which magnetic zone you are in by referring to the zone map 2 Turn the ignition to the on position 60 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls 3 Press and hold the SELECT control until VAR appears in the display then release The display should show the current zone number 4 Press the SELECT control until the desired zone number appears The display will flash and then return to normal operation The zone is now updated Compass calibration adjustment Perform this adjustment in an open area free from steel structures and high voltage lines e Press and hold the SELECT control until CAL appears in the display approximately eight seconds and release e Drive the vehicle slowly less than 3 mph 5 km h in circles until CAL indicator turns off in about 2 3 complete circles e The compass is now calibrated AUXILIARY POWER POINT 12VDC Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert any other object in the power outlet as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty The auxiliary power point
181. icant specifications 303 TUM signal 2 erret 49 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Index U Upfitter controls 68 V Vehicle loading 167 Ventilating your vehicle 193 W Warning lights see Lights 12 Washer fluid asinos 268 Water Driving through 220 Windows DONE c todeeseetobaessdi eee sess men 62 Windshield washer fluid and WIPES c 57 checking and adding fluid 268 replacing wiper blades 269 Wrecker towing sss 248 321
182. icle equipped with an aftermarket power take off system 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction Cell phone use The use of Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasingly important in the conduct of business and personal affairs However drivers must not compromise their own or others safety when using such equipment Mobile Communications can enhance personal safety and security when appropriately used particularly in emergency situations Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications equipment to avoid negating these benefits Mobile Communication Equipment includes but is not limited to cellular phones pagers portable email devices in vehicle communications systems telematics devices and portable two way radios WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The driver s primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so Export unique Non United States Canada vehicle specific information For your particular global region your vehicle may be equipped with features and options that are different from the ones that are described in this Owner s Guide A market unique supplement may be supplied that
183. ing mode How to disengage the automatic locking mode Disconnect the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode 101 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING After any vehicle collision the safety belt systems at all seating positions except the driver position which does not have this feature must be checked by an authorized dealer to verify that the automatic locking retractor feature for child seats is still functioning properly In addition all safety belts should be checked for proper function WARNING BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE REPLACED if the safety belt assembly automatic locking retractor feature or any other safety belt function is not operating properly when checked by an authorized dealer Failure to replace the Belt and Retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions Safety belt pretensioner Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt pretensioners at the driver and front outboard passenger seating positions The safety belt pretensioner tightens the safety belts firmly against the occupant s body at the start of the crash WARNING The driver and front passenger safety belt system including retractors buckles and height adjusters must be replaced if the vehicle is involved in a collision that res
184. ing light fluid leaks strange odors smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control system is not working properly An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust to enter the vehicle Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust system inspected and repaired immediately WARNING Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine By law vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures repairs services sells leases trades vehicles or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent it from working Information about your vehicle s emission system is on the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the engine This decal also lists engine displacement Please consult your Warranty Guide Customer Information Guide for complete emission warranty information On board diagnostics OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine s emission control system This system is commonly known as the On Board Diagnostics System OBD II The OBD II system protects the environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet government emission standards The OBD II system also assists your authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle When the Service engine soon C indicato
185. ire terminology e Tire label A label showing the OE Original Equipment tire sizes recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle can carry e Tire Identification Number TIN A number on the sidewall of each tire providing information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant tire size and date of manufacture Also referred to as DOT code e Inflation pressure A measure of the amount of air in a tire e kPa Kilopascal a metric unit of air pressure e PSI Pounds per square inch a standard unit of air pressure e Cold inflation pressure The tire pressure when the vehicle has been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile 1 6 km 139 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading e Recommended inflation pressure The cold inflation pressure found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door e B pillar The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the front door e Bead area of the tire Area of the tire next to the rim e Sidewall of the tire Area between the bead area and the tread e Tread area of the tire Area of the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle e Rim The metal support wheel for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated INFL
186. iring which connects the components The diagnostic module monitors its own internal circuits and the supplemental airbag electrical system wiring including the impact sensors the system wiring the airbag system readiness light the airbag back up power and the airbag ignitors WARNING Several air bag system components get hot after inflation Do not touch them after inflation WARNING If the air bag has deployed the air bag will not function again and must be replaced immediately If the air bag is not replaced the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a collision Determining if the system is operational The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to indicate the condition of the system Refer to Airbag readiness section in the nstrument Cluster chapter Routine maintenance of the airbag is not required A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following e The readiness light will either ge flash or stay lit ry e The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is turned on e series of five beeps will be heard The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem and or light are repaired If any of these things happen even intermittently contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Unless serviced the system may not function properly in the event of a collision 111 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing US
187. ith sharp objects If the sensors are covered it will affect the accuracy of the RSS If your vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper fascia leaving it misaligned or bent the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms 216 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving REVERSE CAMERA SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The reverse camera system located on the back door provides a video r image which appears in the rear view mirror or navigation screen if oO equipped of the area behind the vehicle It adds assistance to the XX XXXX driver while reversing or reverse parking the vehicle To use the reverse camera system place the transmission in R Reverse an image will display on the left portion of the rear view mirror or on the navigation screen if equipped The area displayed on the screen may vary according to the vehicle orientation and or road condition e 1 Rear bumper e 2 Red zone e 3 Yellow zone e 4 Green zone e 5 Centerline of vehicle Always use caution while backing Objects in the red zone are closest to your vehicle and objects in the green zone are further away Objects are getting closer to your vehicle as they move from the green zone to the yellow or red zones Use the side mirrors and rear view mirror to get better coverage on both sides and rear of the vehicle When shifting out of R Reverse and into a
188. ith tether anchors Front passenger seating position The tether can be attached directly to the rear of the front seat Ez BIN 1 Adjust the front right hand passenger seat full forward 128 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 2 Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the front right hand passenger seat as shown 3 Clip the tether strap hook to the seat pedestal at the location shown If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly the child safety seat may eS 7 not be retained properly in the event of a collision Ag 4 Adjust the front right hand passenger seat to the full rearward position t gt 129 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints b Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions If the safety seat is not anchored properly the risk of a child being injured in a collision greatly increases Second row bucket seats Quads The tether strap can be attached directly to the tether bracket under the back edge of the seat cushion Y Y b 1 Route the child safety tether strap over the back of the left hand or right hand second row bucket seat 2 Clip the tether strap hook to the seat pedestal at the location shown If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly
189. ith the instrument cluster message center to display the following messages TRAILER BRAKE MODULE FAULT This message is displayed and accompanied by a single chime in response to faults sensed by the TBC In the event this message is seen please contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible for diagnosis and repair The TBC may still function but performance may be degraded WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER This message is displayed when a Short circuit on the electric brake output wire has occurred If the WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER message is displayed and accompanied by a single chime with no trailer connected the problem is with the vehicle wiring from the TBC to the 7 pin connector in the bumper If the message is only displayed with a trailer connected the problem is related to the trailer wiring consult your trailer dealer for assistance This can be a short to ground i e chaffed wire or a short to voltage i e pulled pin on trailer emergency break away battery or trailer brakes drawing too much current Note Your TBC can be diagnosed by your authorized dealer to determine exactly which trailer fault has occurred however if the fault is with the trailer this diagnosis is not covered under your Ford warranty 186 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Points to Remember e Remember to adjust gain setting before using the TBC for the first time Readjust GAIN setting o
190. itle In TEXT MODE sometimes the display requires additional text to be displayed When the gt indicator is active press SEEK gt to view the additional display text When the lt indicator is active press SEEK to view the previous display text 14 AM FM Press to select n AM FM1 FM2 frequency band 15 ON OFF Volume Press to turn ON OFF Turn to increase decrease volume Note If the volume is set above a VOL PUSH certain level and the ignition is turned off the volume will come back on at a nominal listening level when the ignition switch is turned back on 16 CD Press to enter CD MP3 we mode If a CD MP38 is already loaded into the system CD MP3 play will begin where it ended last If no CD is loaded NO DISC will appear in the display 17 4 CD eject Press to eject a CD 18 CD slot Insert a CD label side up in the CD slot 26 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Premium Audiophile AM FM in dash six CD MP3 satellite compatible sound system if equipped amp re O X m 15 or new 3 D adidas seek TX seme REW FF FOLDER FOLDER SHUFFLE Il OK G3 L 1 2 3 4 5 WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The driver s p
191. k out assistance key replacement cost is the customer s responsibility fuel delivery Independent Service Contractors if not prohibited by state local or municipal law shall deliver up to 2 0 gallons 7 5L of gasoline or 5 gallons 18 9L of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle Fuel delivery service is limited to two no charge occurrences within a 12 month period e winch out available within 100 feet 30 5 meters of a paved or county maintained road no recoveries e towing Ford Mercury Lincoln eligible vehicle towed to an authorized dealer within 35 miles 56 3 km of the disablement location or to the nearest authorized dealer If a member requests to be towed to an authorized dealer more than 35 miles 56 3 km from the disablement location the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in excess of 35 miles 56 3 km Trailers shall be covered up to 200 if the disabled eligible vehicle requires service at the nearest authorized dealer If the trailer is disabled but the towing vehicle is operational the trailer does not qualify for any roadside services Canadian customers refer to your Customer Information Guide for information on e coverage period e exact fuel amounts e towing of your disabled vehicle e emergency travel expense reimbursement e travel planning benefits 221 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies In Canada for uninterrupted Roadside A
192. ke and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P Park 2 Turn off the engine and remove the key 3 Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly Working with the engine on 1 Set the parking brake and shift to P Park 2 Block the wheels WARNING To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and or personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running 265 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications OPENING THE HOOD d p 1 Inside the vehicle pull the hood release handle located under the bottom left corner of the instrument panel 2 Go to the front of the vehicle and push the auxiliary latch located in the center top of the grill to the left to release the hood 3 Lift the hood and secure it with the prop rod 266 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT Engine compartment component locations Refer to the 6 0 and 6 4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner s Guide Supplement for diesel engine component locations Meee I Windshield washer fluid reservoir 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Engine oil filler cap Automatic transmission fluid dipstick Air filter assembly Engine oil
193. kely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR 2 Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity a defect or condition that substantially impairs the use value or safety of the vehicle OR 3 The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of more than 30 calendar days not necessarily all at one time In the case of 1 or 2 above the consumer must also notify the manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the following address Ford Motor Company 16800 Executive Plaza Drive Mail Drop 3NE B Dearborn MI 48126 THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU BBB AUTO LINE PROGRAM U S ONLY Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer If a warranty concern has not been resolved using the three step procedure outlined on the first page of the Customer Assistance section you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE program The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts mediation and arbitration During mediation a representative of the BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor Company to explore options for settlement of the claim If an agreement is not reached during mediation and your claim is eligible you may participate in the arbitration process An arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that you can present your case in an informal setting before an impartial person The arbitrator will consider the testimony provided and make a decision af
194. km thoroughly check your hitch electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts e When stopped in traffic for long periods of time in hot weather place the gearshift in P Park and increase idle speed This aids engine cooling and air conditioner efficiency e Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade If you must park on a grade place wheel chocks under the trailer s wheels Launching or retrieving a boat Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer into the water Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after the trailer is removed from the water When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval e do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of the rear bumper e do not allow waves to break higher than 6 inches 15 cm above the bottom edge of the rear bumper Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components e causing internal damage to the components e affecting driveability emissions and reliability Replace the rear axle lubricant any time the axle has been submerged in water Rear axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked or changed unless a leak is suspected or repair required RECREATIONAL TOWING Follow these guidelines if you have a need for recreational RV towing An example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle behind a motorhome These guidelines are designed to ensure that your transmission is not damaged
195. l OFF WARNING Do not use the Tow Haul feature when driving in icy or slippery conditions as the increased engine braking can cause the rear wheels to slide and the vehicle to swing around with the possible loss of vehicle control 3 Third Transmission starts and operates in third gear only Used for improved traction on slippery roads Selecting 3 Third provides engine braking 2 Second Use 2 Second to start up on slippery roads or to provide additional engine braking on downgrades 1 First e Provides maximum engine braking e Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever e The transmission will not downshift into 1 First at high speeds it will downshift to a lower gear and then shift into 1 First when the vehicle reaches slower speeds Forced downshifts e Allowed in Overdrive or Drive e Depress the accelerator to the floor e Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear 211 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Understanding the shift positions of the 5 speed automatic transmission ra equipped diesel engines only PRNO21 This vehicle is equipped with an adaptive Transmission Shift Strategy Adaptive Shift Strategy offers the optimal transmission operation and shift quality When the vehicle s battery has been disconnected for any type of service or repair the transmission will need to relearn the normal shift strategy parameters much like havin
196. l capacities 279 308 Specificatloris sereset 303 Cruise control see Speed control 66 Customer Assistance 221 Ford Extended Service PIA ettet Ee 255 Getting assistance outside the U S and Canada 255 Getting roadside assistance 221 Getting the service you need woe eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 250 Ordering additional owner s literabufe Le ctc eere tots 256 Utilizing the Mediation Arbitration Progra scene eret 254 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Index D Daytime running lamps see Lamps cre eee 45 Dipstick automatic transmission che epee REIHE 296 engirie oll as iones 269 Driveline universal joint and SlID YORE 1 eie nine 296 Driving under special conditions through water cee 220 E Electronic message center 69 Emergencies roadside Jump starting oe 242 Emergency Flashers 222 Emission control system 291 ENSIN seroren ceneri 310 cleaning i t rito 260 Coolant 2 rrr WEGE TEE RE 275 diesel sic dot e ees T fail safe cooling 280 idle speed control 272 lubrication specifications 303 refill capacities sss 303 service points sssssss 267 starting after a collision 223 Engine block heater 193 Engine oil 1 esee 269 checking and adding 269 CID STI
197. lant Temperature E ym Engine Coolant i y COP Do Not Open When Hot Battery Avoid Smoking Flames or Sparks Battery Acid Explosive Gas Fan Warning Power Steering Fluid Maintain Correct Fluid C8 ss pe LTE Level Service Engine Soon Engine Air Filter pad Compartment e e Jack o 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus 11 Instrument Cluster WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may become serious enough to cause expensive repairs A warning light may illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle s functions Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the bulb works If any light remains on after starting the vehicle refer to the respective system warning light for additional information If your vehicle is equipped with a Diesel engine it has a unique cluster refer to Starting the engine in your 6 0 and 6 4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner s Guide Supplement Note Some Warning Lights are reconfigurable telltale RTT indicator lights and will illuminate in the message center display and function the same as the warning light Service engine soon The Service engine soon indicator light illuminates when the ignition is first turned to the on position to check the bulb and to indicate whether the vehic
198. ldren are shaped differently The child height age and weight thresholds provided are recommendations or the minimum requirements of law The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA provides education and training to ensure that all children ages 0 to 16 are properly restrained in the correct restraint system Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician CPST and your pediatrician to make sure your seat is appropriate for your child and properly installed in the vehicle To locate a child seat fitting station and CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1 888 327 4236 or on the internet at http www nhtsa dot gov Follow all the safety restraint and airbag precautions that apply to adult passengers in your vehicle If the child is the proper height age and weight as specified by your child safety seat or booster manufacturer fits the restraint and can be 120 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints restrained properly then restrain the child in the child safety seat or with the belt positioning booster Remember that child seats and belt positioning boosters vary and may be designed to fit children of different heights ages and weights Children who are too large for child safety seats or belt positioning boosters as specified by your child safety seat manufacturer should always properly wear safety belts SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN
199. le has no rear seat e the vehicle has a rear seat too small to accommodate a rear facing infant seat or the infant has a medical condition which according to the infant s physician makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front so that the driver can constantly monitor the child s condition 2 Child age 1 to 12 A child age 1 to 12 must ride in the front seat because e the vehicle has no rear seat e although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear seat s whenever possible children ages 1 to 12 sometimes must ride in the front because no space is available in the rear seat s of the vehicle or the child has a medical condition which according to the child s physician makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so that the driver can constantly monitor the child s condition 3 Medical condition A passenger has a medical condition which according to his or her physician e causes the passenger airbag to pose a special risk for the passenger and e makes the potential harm from the passenger airbag in a crash greater than the potential harm from turning OFF the airbag and allowing the passenger even if belted to hit the dashboard or windshield in a crash 115 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING This vehicle has special energy management safety belts for the driver and right front passenger These particular belts are specific
200. le installed in the door inner panel E Guard Cargo Protection System procedure For vehicles equipped with power door locks e Lock the vehicle with the key manual door lock key fob or use the power door lock on the front door trim panel The front doors are locked and the cargo doors are double locked e Unlock the vehicle with the key fob or use the power door lock on the front door The front doors are unlocked and the cargo doors remain double locked e The only way to unlock the side or back cargo doors from outside vehicle is with the key 80 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security For vehicles equipped with manual door locks e The front door locks can be locked by using either the key or the manual door lock In order to activate the E Guard Cargo Protection System use the key or the manual door lock to lock the side and back cargo doors e The cargo doors cannot be unlocked using the manual door lock WARNING If equipped with E Guard Cargo Protection System M occupants may become trapped in the cargo area unless the exit procedure is followed The cargo doors cannot be unlocked using manual or power door locks or key fob In an emergency to exit the cargo area locate the emergency handle in the rear door or side door pull the emergency handle to unlock the door then unlatch the door using the inside release handle Emergency lock release The emergency handle i
201. le is ready for Inspection Maintenance I M testing Normally the Service engine soon light will stay on until the engine is cranked then turn itself off if no malfunctions are present However if after 15 seconds the Service engine soon light blinks eight times it means that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing See the Readiness for Inspection Maintenance Q M testing in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter 12 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the On Board Diagnostics System OBD II has detected a malfunction Refer to On board diagnostics OBD II in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter If the light is blinking engine misfire is occurring which could damage your catalytic converter Drive in a moderate fashion avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration and have your vehicle serviced immediately by your authorized dealer WARNING Under engine misfire conditions excessive exhaust temperatures could damage the catalytic converter the fuel system interior floor coverings or other vehicle components possibly causing a fire Electronic throttle control RTT Displays when the engine has defaulted to a limp home operation Report the fault to a dealer at the earliest opportunity Check fuel cap RTT Displays when the fuel cap may not be TRIP XXX X properly installed Continued drivin
202. le with the engine oil level dipstick and or the engine oil filler cap removed Engine oil and filter recommendations Look for this certification trademark PREAUN MOTOR OIL Use SAE 5W 20 engine oil Only use oils Certified For Gasoline Engines by the American Petroleum Institute API An oil with this trademark symbol conforms to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee ILSAC comprised of U S and Japanese automobile manufacturers To protect your engine and engine s warranty use Motorcraft SAE 5W 20 or an equivalent SAE 5W 20 oil meeting Ford specification WSS M2C930 A SAE 5W 20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and durability performance meeting all requirements for your vehicle s engine Do not use supplemental engine oil additives cleaners or other engine treatments They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that is not covered by Ford warranty Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule listed in the scheduled maintenance information Ford production and Motorcraft replacement oil filters are designed for added engine protection and long life If a replacement oil filter is used 271 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications that does not meet Ford material and design specifications start
203. leaners as these may damage the finish of the instrument panel interior trim and cluster lens WARNING Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of the airbag system If a staining liquid like coffee juice has been spilled on the instrument panel or on interior trim surfaces clean as follows 1 Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean white cotton cloth 2 Apply Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner ZC 11 A In Canada use Motorcraft Multi Purpose Cleaner CXC 101 to the wiped area and spread around evenly 3 Apply more Motorcraft cleaner to a clean white cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled area allow this to set at room temperature for 30 minutes 4 Remove the soaked cloth and if it is not soiled badly use this cloth to clean the area by using a rubbing motion for 60 seconds 5 Following this wipe area dry with a clean white cotton cloth INTERIOR For fabric carpets cloth seats and safety belts e Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner e Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet amp Upholstery Cleaner ZC 54 e f grease or tar is present on the material spot clean the area first with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover ZC 14 In Canada use Motorcraft Multi Purpose Cleaner CXC 101 262 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning
204. les driven year round in non extreme climates should use a 50 50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system and engine protection What you should know about fail safe cooling if equipped If the engine coolant supply is depleted this feature allows the vehicle to be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred The fail safe distance depends on ambient temperatures vehicle load and terrain How fail safe cooling works If the engine begins to overheat e The engine coolant temperature gauge will move to the red hot area e The service engine soon 7 indicator light will illuminate e The engine coolant temperature XE indicator light will illuminate If the engine reaches a preset over temperature condition the engine will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation Each disabled cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine When this occurs the vehicle will still operate However e The engine power will be limited e The air conditioning system will be disabled Continued operation will increase the engine temperature and the engine will completely shut down causing steering and braking effort to increase Once the engine temperature cools the engine can be re started Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible to minimize engine damage 280 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus
205. les each time the engine is started All features of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system TCS ESC and RSC are active and monitor the vehicle from start up However the system will only intervene if the driving situation requires it The AdvanceTrac with RSC system includes an AdvanceTrac with RSC Off button on the center of the instrument panel and a sliding car icon n in the instrument cluster The sliding car icon n in the instrument cluster will illuminate temporarily during start up as part of a normal system self check or during driving if a driving situation causes the AdvanceTrac with RSC system to operate If the sliding car icon n illuminates steadily verify that the AdvanceTrac with RSC system is not manually disabled by pressing the AdvanceTrac with RSC Off button located on the center stack of the instrument panel If the sliding car icon 44 remains steadily illuminated or if the message center if equipped displays SERVICE RSC NOW have the system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately 199 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving When AdvanceTrac with RSC performs a normal system self check some drivers may notice a slight movement of the brake and or a rumble grunting or grinding noise after startup and when driving off When an event occurs that activates AdvanceTrac with RSC9 you may experience the following e A s
206. lications in this portfolio contact Helm Incorporated at HELM INCORPORATED P O Box 07150 Detroit Michigan 48207 Or call For a free publication catalog order toll free 1 800 782 4356 Monday Friday 8 00 a m 6 00 p m EST Helm Incorporated can also be reached by their website www helminc com tems in this catalog may be purchased by credit card check or money order 256 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance Obtaining a French owner s guide French Owner s Guides can be obtained from your authorized dealer or by writing to Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited Service Publications CHQ202 The Canadian Road P O Box 2000 Oakville ON Canada L6J 5E4 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS U S ONLY If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or Ford Motor Company To contact NHTSA you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to Attp www safercar gov or write to
207. light deceleration of the vehicle e The sliding car n indicator light will flash e A vibration in the pedal when your foot is on the brake pedal e If the driving condition is severe and your foot is not on the brake the brake pedal may move as the systems applies higher brake forces You may also hear a whoosh of air from under the instrument panel during this severe condition e The brake pedal may feel stiffer than usual Traction Control TCS Traction Control is a driver aid feature that helps your vehicle maintain traction of the wheels typically when driving on slippery and or hilly road surfaces by detecting and controlling wheel spin Excessive wheel spin is controlled in two ways which may work separately or in tandem Engine Traction Control and Brake Traction Control Engine Traction Control works to limit drive wheel spin by momentarily reducing engine power Brake Traction Control works to limit wheel spin by momentarily applying the brakes to the wheel that is slipping Traction Control is most active at low speeds During Traction Control events the sliding car icon n in the instrument cluster will flash If the Traction Control system is activated excessively in a short period of time the braking portion of the system may become temporarily disabled to allow the brakes to cool down In this situation Traction Control will use only engine power reduction or transfer to help control the wheels from over spinning Wh
208. lity gasoline preferably a national brand e Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the same direction each time you fill up e Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent Calculating fuel economy 1 Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading in miles or kilometers 2 Each time you fill the tank record the amount of fuel added in gallons or liters 3 After at least three to five tank fill ups fill the fuel tank and record the current odometer reading 4 Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer reading 5 Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel economy Calculation 1 Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used Calculation 2 Multiply liters used by 100 then divide by total kilometers traveled Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving city or highway This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle s fuel economy under current driving conditions Additionally keeping records during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel economy In general lower temperatures give lower fuel economy Driving style good driving and fuel economy habits Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change a number of variables and improve your fuel economy
209. lock control on the door panel three times 5 Turn the ignition back to the on position The horn will chirp one time to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active 6 To enable disable the autolock feature press the unlock control then press the lock control The horn will chirp once if autolock was deactivated or twice one short and one long chirp if autolock was activated 7 Turn the ignition to the off position The horn will chirp once to confirm the procedure is complete 79 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Back cargo door lock if equipped The passenger side rear cargo door has a power door lock control mounted on the inside of the door a When this lock is pressed all doors will lock unlock E Guard Cargo Protection System if equipped The E Guard Cargo Protection System insures that the side and cargo doors are double locked for extra security E Guard Cargo Protection System features e The E Guard Cargo Protection System is available with either power or manual door locks e The E Guard Cargo Protection System provides extra security via a double locked design The cargo doors can only be unlocked from the outside by using the keys e The power unlock feature if equipped with power door locks will only unlock the front doors e The E Guard Cargo Protection System is equipped with an emergency unlock hand
210. low Vehicle sensitive mode This is the normal retractor mode which allows free shoulder belt length adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle movement For example if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner sharply or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph 8 km h or more the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce forward movement of the driver and passengers Automatic locking mode When to use the automatic locking mode In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt 100 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints This mode should be used any time a child safety seat except a booster is installed in passenger front or rear seating position if equipped Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible Refer to Safety restraints Jor children or Safety seats for children later in this chapter How to use the automatic locking mode e Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt NC ee 4 e Grasp the shoulder portion and V pull downward until the entire belt is pulled out N x e Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic lock
211. lso recommended to fill the fuel tank with regular unleaded gasoline once every 3 000 miles 4 800 km See scheduled maintenance information for more information Running out of fuel Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse effect on powertrain components 287 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications If you have run out of fuel e You may need to cycle the ignition from off to on several times after refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to the engine On restarting cranking time will take a few seconds longer than normal Normally adding 1 gallon 3 8L of fuel is enough to restart the engine If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade more than 1 gallon 3 8L may be required e The Service engine soon C indicator may come on For more information on the Service engine soon C indicator refer to Warning lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY Measuring techniques Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you the driver You must gather information as accurately and consistently as possible Fuel expense frequency of fill ups or fuel gauge readings are NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy We do not recommend taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km of driving engine break in period You will get a more a
212. lt in a collision High beams E D Push the lever toward the instrument panel to activate Pull the lever towards you to deactivate 45 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights Flash to pass Pull toward you slightly to activate and release to deactivate PANEL DIMMER CONTROL Use to adjust the brightness of the Xx instrument panel and all applicable C illuminated switches in the vehicle during headlamp and parklamp operation Move the control to the full upright position past detent to turn on the interior lamps Note If the battery is disconnected discharged or a new battery is installed the dimmer switch requires re calibration Rotate the dimmer switch from the full dim position to the full dome on position to reset This will ensure that your displays are visible under all lighting conditions The dome lamp will not illuminate if the control switch is not rotated past the detent VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL AIM ADJUSTMENT SEALED BEAM HEADLAMPS The headlamps on your vehicle are intended to be aimed using mechanical aimers If mechanical aimers are used and the cross car sight line is in any way blocked set the legs of the universal adaptor all to the same setting such that the cross car sight line is no longer blocked per the instructions for the brand of mechanical aimer used You can also aim the headlamps visually using the procedure below 46 2009 Econoline eco
213. lume to 1 2 the volume 34 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 6 Press AUX on the vehicle radio repeatedly until LINE LINE IN or SYNC LINE IN appears in the display You should hear audio from your portable music player although it may be low 7 Adjust the sound on your portable music player until it reaches the level of the FM station or CD by switching back and forth between the AUX and FM or CD controls Troubleshooting 1 Do not connect the audio input jack to a line level output Line level outputs are intended for connection to a home stereo and are not compatible with the AIJ The AIJ will only work correctly with devices that have a headphone output with a volume control 2 Do not set the portable music player s volume level higher than is necessary to match the volume of the CD or FM radio in your audio system as this will cause distortion and will reduce sound quality Many portable music players have different output levels so not all players should be set at the same levels Some players will sound best at full volume and others will need to be set at a lower volume 3 If the music sounds distorted at lower listening levels turn the portable music player volume down If the problems persist replace or recharge the batteries in the portable music player 4 The portable music player must be controlled in the same manner when it is used with headphones as the AIJ doe
214. m Association T amp RA that is intended for temporary service on cars SUVs minivans and light trucks 2 145 Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge In general the larger the number the wider the tire S OY TS AW y QWo sn anae 3 80 Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire s ratio of height to width Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall 4 D Indicates a diagonal type tire R Indicates a radial type tire 5 16 Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches If you change your wheel size you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter Location of the tire label You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size and other important information located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door Refer to the payload description and graphic in the Vehicle loading with and without a trailer section 155 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS IF EQUIPPED Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire infl
215. n If the pointer moves and stays outside the normal operating range have the vehicle s electrical system checked by your authorized dealer as soon as possible 18 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Engine oil pressure gauge Indicates engine oil pressure The needle should stay in the normal operating range between L and H If the needle falls below the normal range stop the vehicle turn off the engine and check the engine oil level Add oil if needed If the oil level is correct have your vehicle checked by your authorized dealer Fuel gauge Indicates approximately how much fuel is left in the fuel tank when the ignition is in the on position The fuel gauge may vary slightly when the vehicle is in motion or on a grade The FUEL icon and arrow indicates which side of the vehicle the fuel filler door is located Refer to Filling the tank in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information 19 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems AUDIO SYSTEMS AM FM stereo system if equipped CLK A S 2 6 3C E AUDIO FM Y e VOL PUSH 1 2 3 4 5 6 WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may
216. n the TBC according to procedure above whenever road weather and trailer or vehicle loading conditions change from those that existed when the gain was initially set The sliding lever on the TBC should be used only for manual activation of trailer brakes to assist with proper adjustment of the GAIN Misuse such as application during trailer sway could cause instability of trailer and or tow vehicle Avoid towing in adverse weather conditions The TBC does not provide anti lock control of the trailer wheels Trailer wheels can lock up on slippery surfaces resulting in reduced stability of trailer and tow vehicle e The TBC interacts with the brake system of the vehicle including ABS in order to reduce the likelihood of trailer wheel lockup Therefore if these systems are not functioning properly the TBC may not function at full performance e When the vehicle is turned off the TBC Output is disabled and the display is shut down Reactivation of the ignition from OFF to ON will awaken the TBC module e The TBC is only a factory or dealer installed item Ford is not responsible for warranty or performance of the TBC due to misuse or customer installation e Do not attempt removal of the TBC without consulting the Workshop Manual Damage to the unit may result Trailer lamps Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles Make sure all running lights brake lights turn signals and hazard lights are working Contact your autho
217. n the door trim panel unlocks the E Guard Cargo Protection System The emergency handles are located in the following areas e The side door emergency handle is located on the door inner trim panel in the speaker cup 8l 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security e The rear door handle is located in the rear door below the glass To open the side or back cargo doors from the inside 1 Unlock the E Guard Cargo Protection System using the emergency handle 2 Unlatch the door using the inside release handle REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment The typical operating range for your remote entry transmitter is approximately 33 feet 10 meters A decrease in operating range could be caused by e weather conditions e nearby radio towers e structures around the vehicle or e other vehicles parked next to your vehicle 82 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security The remote entr
218. n you pass a ground based broadcast repeating tower a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in an audio mute Unlike AM FM audible static you will hear an audio mute when there is a satellite radio signal interference Your radio display may display NO SIGNAL to indicate the interference SIRIUS satellite radio service SIRIUS Satellite Radio is a subscription based satellite radio service that broadcasts music sports news and entertainment programming A service fee is required in order to receive SIRIUS service Vehicles that are equipped with a factory installed SIRIUS Satellite Radio system include e Hardware and limited subscription term which begins on the date of sale or lease of the vehicle e Use of online media player providing access to all SIRIUS music channels over the internet using any computer connected to the internet U S customers only For information on extended subscription terms contact SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 Note SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right to change rearrange add or delete programming including canceling moving or adding particular channels and its prices at any time with or without notice to you Ford Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming changes Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number ESN This 12 digit Satellite Serial Number is needed to activate modify or track your satellite radio account You will need this number when communicating
219. nd back to make sure the seat is securely held in place To check this grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side to side and forward and back There should be no more than one inch 2 5 cm of movement for proper installation 11 Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician CPST to make certain the child restraint is properly installed Attaching child safety seats with LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren attachments The LATCH system is composed of three vehicle anchor points two 2 lower anchors located where the vehicle seat back and seat cushion meet called the seat bight and one 1 top tether anchor located behind that seating position LATCH compatible child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that connect to the two lower anchors at the LATCH equipped seating positions in your vehicle This type of attachment method eliminates the need to use safety belts to attach the child seat however the safety belt can still be used to attach the child seat For 124 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints forward facing child seats the top tether strap must also be attached to the proper top tether anchor if a top tether strap has been provided with your child seat Ford Motor Company recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tether strap See Attaching child safety seats
220. nd should be inspected by an authorized dealer If the vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking the vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer Refer to Brake system warning light in the Imstrument Cluster chapter for information on the brake system warning light BRAKE Four wheel anti lock brake system ABS Your vehicle is equipped with an Anti lock Braking System ABS This system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by keeping the brakes from locking Noise from the ABS pump motor and brake pedal pulsation may be observed during ABS braking and the brake pedal may suddenly travel a little farther as soon as ABS braking is done and normal brake operation resumes These are normal characteristics of the ABS and should be no reason for concern 195 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Using ABS When hard braking is required apply continuous force on the brake pedal do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the effectiveness of the ABS and will increase your vehicle s stopping distance The ABS will be activated immediately allowing you to retain steering control during hard braking and on slippery surfaces However the ABS does not decrease stopping distance ABS warning lamp The ABS lamp in the instrument cluster momentarily illuminates when the ignition is turned on If the light does not illuminate during
221. nd tow hooks may affect the performance of the airbag system increasing the risk of injury Do not modify the front end of the vehicle WARNING Additional equipment may affect the performance of the airbag sensors increasing the risk of injury Please refer to the Body Builders Layout Book for instructions about the appropriate installation of additional equipment Children and airbags Children must always be properly restrained Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of injury in a collision SN n 109 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the seat all the way back How does the airbag supplemental restraint system work The airbag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains a longitudinal deceleration sufficient to cause the airbag sensors to close an electrical circuit that initiates airbag inflation The fact that the airbags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system Rather it means the forces were not sufficient enough to cause a
222. ness for Inspection Maintenance I M testing Some state provincial and local governments may have Inspection Maintenance I M programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration Your vehicle may not pass the I M test if the Service engine soon C indicator is on or not working properly bulb is burned out or if the OBD II system has determined that some of the emission control systems have not been properly checked In this case the vehicle is considered not ready for I M testing If the Service engine soon C indicator is on or the bulb does not work the vehicle may need to be serviced Refer to the On board diagnostics OBD II description in this chapter If the vehicle s engine or transmission has just been serviced or the battery has recently run down or been replaced the OBD II system may indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing To determine if the vehicle is ready for I M testing turn the ignition key to the on position for 15 seconds without cranking the engine If the Service engine soon C indicator blinks eight times it means that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing if the Service engine soon C indicator stays on solid it means that the vehicle is ready for I M testing 293 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications The OBD II system is designed to che
223. ng Pressing and holding a button will raise or lower the setting continuously The gain setting will display in the message center as follows TBC GAIN XX X The trailer brake controller TBC is designed to display three items of information in the instrument cluster message center These are gain setting output bar graph and trailer connectivity status They will appear as follows in the message center e TBC GAIN XX X NO TRAILER The instrument cluster message center will display the current gain setting during a given ignition cycle and when adjusting the gain This message is also displayed 184 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading during manual activation without a trailer connected or when gain adjustments are made with no trailer connected e TBC GAIN XX X OUTPUT When the vehicle s brake pedal is pushed or when the manual control is activated bar indicators will illuminate in the instrument cluster message center to indicate the amount of power going to the trailer brakes relative to the brake pedal or manual control input One bar indicates the least amount of output with six bars indicating maximum output e TRAILER CONNECTED This message is displayed when a correct trailer wiring connection a trailer with electric trailer brakes has been sensed during a given ignition cycle e TRAILER DISCONNECTED This message is dis
224. ng USA fus Maintenance and Specifications High fluid level Fluid levels above the safe range may result in transmission failure An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and or engagement concerns and or possible damage High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels Before adding any fluid make sure the correct type is used The type of fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter Use of a non approved automatic transmission fluid may cause internal transmission component damage If necessary add fluid in 1 2 pint 250 ml increments through the filler tube until the level is correct If an overfill occurs excess fluid should be removed by an authorized dealer 299 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and or engagement concerns and or possible damage Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives treatments or cleaning agents The use of these materials may affect transmission operation and result in damage to internal transmission components Automatic transmission fluid filter The Torqshift automatic transmission is equipped with a serviceable transmission fluid filter located inside the transmission
225. ng acceleration or braking Again avoid these abrupt inputs AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION Brake shift interlock The vehicle is equipped with a brake shift interlock feature that prevents the gearshift lever from being moved from P Park unless the brake pedal is depressed 205 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P Park position with the ignition in the 4 on position and the brake pedal depressed a malfunction may have occurred It is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle s brakelamps are not operating properly Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter If the fuses and brakelamps are working properly and the vehicle still will not shift out of P Park see your authorized dealer for service If the fuse is not blown perform the following procedure 1 Apply the parking brake and turn the ignition to the 4 on position 2 Remove the lower trim panel under the steering column Make sure not disturb the wires on the electrical connector 3 Locate the BSI solenoid underneath the steering column 4 With your hand pull back on the solenoid and at the same time shift ANN the transmission into N Neutral y pc 5 Start the vehicle See your authorized dealer for service immediately WARNING Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelamps are working WARNING Alwa
226. niversal joints are replaced with universal joints equipped with grease fittings lubrication will also be necessary TRANSMISSION FLUID Checking automatic transmission fluid if equipped Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled intervals for fluid checks and changes Your transmission does not consume fluid However the fluid level should be checked if the transmission is not working properly i e if the transmission slips or shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed To obtain an accurate fluid check drive the vehicle until it is at normal operating temperature approximately 20 miles 30 km If your vehicle has been operated for an extended period at high speeds in city traffic during hot weather or pulling a trailer the vehicle should be turned off for about 30 minutes to allow fluid to cool before checking 1 Drive the vehicle 20 miles 30 km or until it reaches normal operating temperature 2 Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake 3 With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear ranges Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage 4 Latch the gearshift lever in P Park and leave the engine running 5 Remove the dipstick wiping it clean with a clean dry lint free rag If necessary refer to Identifying components in t
227. ny other gear the image will remain on for a few seconds before it shuts off to assist in parking or trailer hookup If equipped with the Navigation system after shifting out of R Reverse and into any gear other than P Park the image will remain until the vehicle speed reaches 5 mph 8 km h only if the rear camera delay feature is on or until any navigation radio button is depressed 217 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Note The default setting for the rear camera delay is off Push the Settings button found on the navigation screen if equipped to set the rear camera delay feature to on or off When towing the reverse camera system will only see what is being towed behind the vehicle this might not provide adequate coverage as it usually provides in normal operation and some objects might not be seen The camera lens for the reverse camera system is located on the backdoor above the license plate Keep the lens clean so the video image remains clear and undistorted Clean the lens with a soft lint free cloth and non abrasive cleaner Note If the reverse camera system image is not clear or seems distorted it may be covered with water droplets snow mud or any other substance If this occurs clean the camera lens before using the reverse camera system WARNING The reverse camera system is a reverse aid supplement device that still requires the driver to use it in conjunction
228. o purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter 6 95 Indicates the tire s load index It is an index that relates to how much weight a tire can carry You may find this information in your Owner s Guide If not contact a local tire dealer Note You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law 7 H Indicates the tire s speed rating The speed rating denotes the speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure The tires on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation pressure These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference in conditions The ratings range from 81 mph 130 km h to 186 mph 299 km h These ratings are listed in the following chart 151 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Note You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law a REET po NT 8 mph 40 kv po QT 99 mph 159 rw R 106 mph GT rev 8 mph 80 ern U I4mph00kn V 19mph 240kn Note For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph 240 km h tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR For those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph 299 km h tire manufacturers always use the letters ZR
229. ode For more information on track and folder mode refer to Sample MP3 structure in the following section e MP3 track mode ignores any folder structure on the MP3 disc The player numbers each MP3 track on the disc noted by the mp3 file extension from T001 to a maximum of T255 Note The maximum number of playable MP3 files may be less depending on the structure of the CD and exact model of radio present e MP3 folder mode represents a folder structure consisting of one level of folders The CD player numbers all MP3 tracks on the disc noted by the mp3 file extension and all folders containing MP3 files from F001 folder T001 track to F253 T255 Creating discs with only one level of folders will help with navigation through the disc files 37 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Sample MP3 structure If you are burning your own MP3 discs it is important to understand 9 how the system will read the structures you create While various Wt 6 mp3 O files may be present files with L mp3 extensions other than mp3 only l files with the mp3 extension will be played Other files will be ignored y y Ji mpa 3 by the system This enables you to use the same MP3 disc for a variety fi mps 9 of tasks on your work computer Jo mp3 home computer and your in vehicle system FTM 6 L mp3 e LP doc El ppt z xls In t
230. ods ploy 19qumu 3j34ed p o q s d reo dogs we sds Sut 007 PUSU I9sorp 3ue ooo ursug yeoy Jeol xn uA ouiguo 8 9 3ue ooo usuy oulsue 8 9 3ue ooo usuy yeoy Jeol xn uA ouiguo Trg 3ue ooo susug oulsue Trg 3ue ooo susug yeoy Jeol xn YIM ouiguo T9 F 3ue ooo ouu oulsue T9 F 3ue ooo usuy 304 Owners Guide 1st Printing 2009 Econoline eco USA fus Maintenance and Specifications V 66106W ISM TO OVIMGL AX 9Tu amp oLIqnrT o9 xy Te oneuu g OFT MGL AVS e187 Squid 6 9 eL sj1enb g gT AT eNOOUWIN NTO 0T LX wLLV AT eNOOWMIN T J21030 A ITED syrenb 6er AT eNOOUMWIN LACIO OTALX A SNOOSWMSIN WO S LX pllV AT eNOOSHIN J 19030 X yorsdip uo og8ued TINA ut deox ALV A eNOOSMIN J 191030 A Tuewejddmng apiny saowmqQ esewq oqun wouoetu 1204 AYOALG 4omog Tt 9 PUY TOG IU 01 I JOY epeuen TO 4030 N umrurodq Jadns 06 AAS AVS 3J J91010 A SM TIO 1090W pueTg oneuqu Ag umrmroJdq 06 AAS AVS 3J J910310 A JIEN uoneogrior IdV U V 0860ZIN SSM epeuen ZIdST 0 M9 OXO SM dS6 0 M9 OX 14 8 Syrenb 9 uornvorgroods ploy OPI 9 Xe OL T u 096 4 SPZ 09IN ping axe ds pejrurT peods g 3rugbuoj pmg uorssrumsuer orjeurogny CIGAWT pmg uorssrmusuez orpeurogny pm SULI90 S I MOd oulsue JeSseIp lo ourdu qo susug 305 Owners Guide 1st Printing 2009 Econoline eco USA fus Maintenance and Specifications V 66106W ISM TO OVIMGL
231. oduct e Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non body low gloss black colored trim such as grained door handles roof racks bumpers side moldings mirror housings or the windshield cowl area The paint sealant will gray or stain the parts over time e Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with the sliding door electrical contact switches Paint sealant or other contaminants could interfere with the proper operation of the power locks or radio speakers If necessary clean the contacts with Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 to remove any sealant Do not use any abrasives on the contact surfaces PAINT CHIPS Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match your vehicle s color Take your color code printed on a sticker in the driver s door jamb to your authorized dealer to ensure you get the correct color e Remove particles such as bird droppings tree sap insect deposits tar spots road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips e Always read the instructions before using the products ALUMINUM WHEELS AND WHEEL COVERS Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint finish In order to maintain their shine e Clean weekly with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner ZC 37 A which is available from your authorized dealer Heavy dirt and brake dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream of water e Never apply any
232. oline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break in oils since these additives may prevent piston ring seating See Engine oil in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information on oil usage SPECIAL NOTICES New Vehicle Limited Warranty For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by your vehicle s New Vehicle Limited Warranty refer to the Warranty Guide Customer Information Guide that is provided to you along with your Owner s Guide Service Data Recording Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and storing diagnostic information about your vehicle This potentially includes information about the performance or status of various systems and modules in the vehicle such as engine throttle steering or brake systems In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle Ford Motor Company Ford of Canada and service and repair facilities may access vehicle diagnostic information through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle Event Data Recording Other modules in your vehicle event data recorders are capable of collecting and storing data during a crash or near crash event The recorded information may assist in the investigation of such an event The modules may record information about both the vehicle and the occupants potentially including
233. on allows automatic upshifts and downshifts through gears one through five D Drive without Overdrive D Drive without Overdrive can be 34 activated by pressing the transmission control switch TCS ON OFF I on the end of the gearshift lever e This position allows for all forward gears except overdrive e The O D OFF lamp will illuminate 0 D in the instrument cluster OFF Provides engine braking e Use when driving conditions cause excessive shifting from O D to other gears Examples heavy city traffic where continuous shifting in and out of overdrive occurs hilly terrain heavy loads trailer towing and when engine braking is required e To return to O D Overdrive press the transmission control switch The O D OFF lamp will not be illuminated e O D Overdrive is automatically returned each time the key is turned off 3 Third Transmission starts and operates in third gear only Used for improved traction on slippery roads Selecting 3 Third provides additional engine braking 2 Second Use 2 Second to start up on slippery roads or to provide additional engine braking on downgrades 1 First e Provides maximum engine braking e Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever 213 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving e The transmission will not downshift into 1 First at high speeds it will downshift to a lower gear and then shift
234. one coin type three volt lithium battery CR2032 or equivalent To replace the battery 1 Twist a thin coin between the two halves of the remote entry transmitter near the key ring DO NOT TAKE THE RUBBER COVER AND CIRCUIT BOARD OFF THE FRONT HOUSING OF THE REMOTE ENTRY TRANSMITTER 84 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security 2 Do not wipe off any grease on the battery terminals on the back K A surface of the circuit board 3 Remove the old battery Note Please refer to local regulations when disposing of transmitter batteries AH3 LIV8 SDV 1d 4 Insert the new battery Refer to the diagram inside the remote entry x transmitter for the correct orientation of the battery Press the battery down to ensure that the battery is fully seated in the battery housing cavity 5 Snap the two halves back together Note Replacement of the battery will not cause the remote transmitter to become deprogrammed from your vehicle The remote transmitter should operate normally after battery replacement Replacing lost remote entry transmitters If you would like to have your remote entry transmitter reprogrammed because you lost one or would like to buy additional remote entry transmitters you can either reprogram them yourself or take all remote entry transmitters to your authorized dealer for reprogramming How to reprogram your remote entry transmitters
235. onoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading NOTICE TO UTILITY VEHICLE AND TRUCK OWNERS Utility vehicles and trucks handle differently than passenger cars in the various driving conditions that are encountered on streets highways and off road Utility vehicles and trucks are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off road conditions WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles To reduce the risk of serious injury or death from a rollover or other crash you must e Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers e Drive at safe speeds for the conditions e Keep tires properly inflated e Never overload or improperly load your vehicle and e Make sure every passenger is properly restrained WARNING In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt All occupants must wear seat belts and children infants must use appropriate restraints to minimize the risk of injury or ejection Study your Owner s Guide and any supplements for specific information about equipment features instructions for safe driving and additional precautions to reduce the risk of an accident or serious injury 136 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading VEHICLE
236. or vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the authorized dealer to resolve a factory related vehicle service concern have been unsatisfactory Ford of Canada participates in an impartial third party mediation arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan CAMVAP The CAMVAP program is a straight forward and relatively speedy alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a settlement have failed This procedure is without cost to you and is designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal proceedings In the CAMVAP program impartial third party arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal environment These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the parties make decisions and when appropriate render awards to resolve disputes CAMVAP decisions are fast fair and final as the arbitrator s award is binding both to you and Ford of Canada CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces For more information without charge or obligation call your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator directly at 1 800 207 0685 254 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance FORD EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN You can get more protection for your new car or light truck by purchasing Ford Extended Service
237. or view the station name or type To search for specific RBDS music categories When the desired category appears in the display press A IV to find the desired type then press and release SEEK SEEK gt or press and hold SCAN to begin the search To view the station name or type When the desired category appears in the display press TEXT SCAN to toggle between displaying the station type COUNTRY ROCK etc or the station name WYCD WXYZ etc BASS Press MENU to reach the bass setting Use A IW to adjust 23 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems TREB Treble Press MENU to reach the treble setting Use A IV to adjust BAL Balance Press MENU to reach the balance setting Use A IV to adjust the audio between the left L and right R speakers Press OK to close and return to the main menu FADE If equipped with four speaker audio system Press MENU to reach the fade setting Use A IV to adjust the audio between the back B and front F speakers SPEED VOL Speed sensitive volume if equipped Press MENU to reach the SPEEDVOL setting Radio volume automatically gets louder with increasing vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise Use A IV to adjust The default setting is off increasing your vehicle speed will not change the volume level Adjust 1 7 Increasing this setting from 1 lowest setting to 7 highest setting allows the radio volume
238. or your vehicle contact a regional office or owner relations customer relationship office The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause engine knocking or serious engine damage Ford Motor Company Ford of Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper fuel Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle back into the U S 255 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Central America the Caribbean or the Middle East contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer cannot help you contact FORD MOTOR COMPANY FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS 1555 Fairlane Drive Fairlane Business Park 3 Allen Park Michigan 48101 U S A Telephone 813 594 4857 FAX 813 390 0804 Email expcac ford com If you are in another foreign country contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer employees cannot help you they can direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of the U S or Canada register your vehicle identification number VIN and new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations Customers in the U S should call 1 800 392 3673 ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER S LITERATURE To order the pub
239. ot essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so Your vehicle may be equipped with an Auxiliary Input Jack AIJ The Auxiliary Input Jack located on the instrument panel near the radio provides a way to connect your portable music player to the in vehicle audio system This allows the audio from a portable music player to be played through the vehicle speakers with high fidelity To achieve optimal performance please observe the following instructions when attaching your portable music device to the audio system If your vehicle is equipped with a navigation system refer to Auxiliary input jack section in the Audio features chapter of your Navigation system supplement Required equipment 1 Any portable music player designed to be used with headphones 2 An audio extension cable with stereo male 1 8 in 3 5 mm connectors at each end To play your portable music player using the auxiliary input jack 1 Begin with the vehicle parked and the radio turned off 2 Ensure that the battery in your portable music player is new or fully charged and that the device is turned off 3 Attach one end of the audio extension cable to the headphone output of your player and the other end of the audio extension cable to the AIJ in your vehicle 4 Turn the radio on using either a tuned FM station or a CD loaded into the system Adjust the volume to a comfortable listening level 5 Turn the portable music player on and adjust the vo
240. ot be covered by your warranty Many of the world s automakers approved the World Wide Fuel Charter that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle Gasolines that meet the World Wide Fuel Charter should be used when available Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the World Wide Fuel Charter Unleaded gasoline engines If you are experiencing starting rough idle or hesitation driveability problems during a cold start try a different brand of Regular unleaded gasoline Premium unleaded gasoline is not recommended because it may cause these problems to become more pronounced If the problems persist see your authorized dealer FFV engine if equipped To identify if your vehicle is an FFV it may be equipped with a yellow fuel cap with the text E85 Gasoline or check if there is a label on the fuel filler door It is best not to alternate repeatedly between gasoline and E85 If you do switch fuels it is recommended that you add as much fuel as possible at least half a tank Do not add less than five gallons 18 9 L when refueling You should drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least 5 miles 8 km to allow the vehicle to adapt to the change in ethanol concentration If you operate your vehicle 50 or more of the time on ethanol you should follow a different maintenance schedule In addition to this it is a
241. ot is located between the two holes If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly the child safety seat may not be retained properly in the event of a collision 4 Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions If the safety seat is not anchored properly the risk of a child being injured in a collision greatly increases 181 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Child booster seats The belt positioning booster booster seat is used to improve the fit of the vehicle safety belt Children outgrow a typical child seat e g convertible or toddler seat when they weigh about 40 Ib 18 kg and are around four 4 years of age Consult your child safety seat owner guide for the weight height and age limits specific to your child safety seat Keep your child in the child safety seat if it properly fits the child remains appropriate for their weight height and age AND if properly secured to the vehicle Although the lap shoulder belt will provide some protection children who have outgrown a typical child seat are still too small for lap shoulder belts to fit properly and wearing an improperly fitted vehicle safety belt could increase the risk of serious injury in a crash To improve the fit of both the lap and shoulder belt on children who have outgrown child safety seats Ford Motor Company recommends use of a belt positioning booster
242. otecting the environment Correct vehicle usage and the authorized disposal of waste cleaning and lubrication materials are significant steps towards this aim Information in this respect is highlighted in this guide with the tree symbol CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm PERCHLORATE MATERIAL Certain components of this vehicle such as airbag modules seat belt pretensioners and button cell batteries may contain Perchlorate Material Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate BREAKING IN YOUR VEHICLE Your vehicle does not need an extensive break in Try not to drive continuously at the same speed for the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km of new vehicle operation Vary your speed frequently in order to give the moving parts a chance to break in Drive your new vehicle at least 1 000 miles 1 600 km before towing a trailer For more detailed information about towing a trailer refer to Trawler towing in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter 2009 Econ
243. ourself and others who may use the vehicle To reduce the risk of injury do not deactivate activate the Belt Minder feature while driving the vehicle 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position DO NOT START THE ENGINE 2 Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off Approximately one minute e Step 3 must be completed within 30 seconds after the safety belt warning light turns off 3 At a moderate speed buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times ending with the safety belt in the unbuckled state e After Step 3 is complete the safety belt warning light will be turned on for three seconds e Belt Minder will automatically exit programming mode without changing its enable status if Step 4 does not occur within 10 seconds of the end of Step 3 4 Within approximately seven seconds of the light turning off buckle then unbuckle the safety belt e This will disable the Belt Minder feature for that seating position if it is currently enabled As confirmation the safety belt warning light will flash four times per second for three seconds 106 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints e This will enable the Belt Minder feature for that seating position if it is currently disabled As confirmation the safety belt warning light will flash four times per second for three seconds followed by three seconds with the light off then followed by the safety belt
244. ous injury or death in a collision 112 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Turning the passenger airbag off 1 Insert the ignition key turn the switch to OFF position and hold in OFF position while removing the key 2 When the ignition is turned to the ON position the OFF light NS PASSENGER illuminates briefly momentarily AIRBAG shuts off and then turns back on This indicates that the passenger airbag is deactivated WARNING If the light fails to illuminate when the passenger air bag switch is in the OFF position and the ignition switch is in ON contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible WARNING In order to avoid inadvertent activation of the switch always remove the ignition key from the passenger air bag ON OFF switch WARNING An infant in a rear facing seat faces a high risk of serious or fatal injuries from a deploying passenger airbag Rear facing infant seats should NEVER be placed in the front seats unless the passenger airbag is turned off Turning the passenger airbag back on The passenger airbag remains OFF until you turn it back ON 1 Insert the ignition key and turn the switch to ON 2 The OFF light will briefly illuminate when the ignition is turned to On This indicates that the passenger airbag is operational P PASSENGER AIRBAG 113 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st
245. p tether strap to the proper top tether anchor do not tighten the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat cushion when the child is seated in it Keep the tether strap just snug 126 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints without lifting the front of the child seat Keeping the child seat just touching the vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash Each time you use the safety seat check that the seat is properly attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor if applicable Tug the child seat from side to side and forward and back where it is secured to the vehicle The seat should move less than one inch when you do this for a proper installation If the safety seat is not anchored properly the risk of a child being injured in a crash greatly increases Combining safety belt and LATCH lower anchors for attaching child safety seats When used in combination either the safety belt or the LATCH lower anchors may be attached first provided a proper installation is achieved Attach the tether strap afterward if included with the child seat Refer to Recommendations for attaching safety restraints for children in this chapter Attaching child safety seats with tether straps WARNING When using forward facing child safety seats in vehicles with only two seating positions or the forward facing child safety seat cannot be placed in the rear of the ve
246. pair or replace any properly dealer installed Genuine Ford Accessories found to be defective in factory supplied materials or workmanship during the warranty period as well as any component damaged by the defective accessories The accessories will be warranted for whichever provides you the greatest benefit e 12 months or 12 000 miles 20 000 km whichever occurs first or e the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty Contact your dealer for details and a copy of the warranty The following is a list of several Genuine Ford Accessories Not all accessories are available for all models For a complete listing of the accessories that are available for your vehicle please contact your dealer or visit our online store at www fordaccessories com Exterior style Bug shields Deflectors Running boards Splash guards Interior style Electrochromatic compass temperature interior mirrors Floor mats Lifestyle Trailer hitches wiring harnesses and accessories Peace of mind Mobile Ease hands free communication system Remote start Vehicle security systems 314 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Accessories For maximum vehicle performance keep the following information in mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle e When adding accessories equipment passengers and luggage to your vehicle do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle G
247. pdate of channel programming in progress Satellite service has been deactivated by SIRIUS Satellite Radio NAVIGATION SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED UPDATING CALL SIRIUS 1 888 539 7474 Song title information Song title information not available at this time on this channel The system is working properly Category information not available at this time on this channel The system is working properly You are in a location that is blocking the SIRIUS signal i e tunnel under an overpass dense foliage etc The system is working properly When you move into an open area the signal should return No action required The process may take up to three minutes Call SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 to re activate or resolve subscription issues Your vehicle may be equipped with a navigation system Refer to the Navigation system supplement for further information 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus 41 Climate Controls HEATER ONLY SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED 1 Fan speed adjustment Controls the volume of air circulated in the vehicle 2 Temperature selection Controls the temperature of the airflow in the vehicle 3 Air flow selections Controls the direction of the airflow in the vehicle See the following for a brief description on each control VENT Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents FLR Distributes outside air through the floor vents OFF Out
248. pe feature One extra wipe will occur a few seconds after washing the front window to clear any excess washer fluid remaining on the windshield Note Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty This may cause the washer pump to overheat Check the washer fluid level frequently Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry This may scratch the glass damage the wiper blades and cause the wiper motor to burn out Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield always use the windshield washer In freezing weather be sure the wiper blades are not frozen to the windshield before operating the wipers 57 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls TILT STEERING WHEEL To adjust the steering wheel 1 Pull and hold the steering wheel release control toward you 2 Move the steering wheel up or down until you find the desired location 3 Release the steering wheel release control This will lock the steering wheel in position WARNING Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR IF EQUIPPED Lift the mirror cover to turn on the visor mirror lamp OVERHEAD CONSOLE IF EQUIPPED The appearance of your vehicle s overhead console will vary according to your option package 58 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Storage compartment if equipped Press the release on the
249. ped repeat Steps 1 through 6 To install the seat WARNING Ensure that the seat is installed or removed from the striker pins with adequate ergonomic assistance Due to the weight of the seat it must be handled by at least two adults during installation or removal from the vehicle WARNING Ensure that the seat is latched to the vehicle floor by pushing pulling on the seat or seatback 2 If not latched the seat may cause injury during a sudden stop 1 Please make sure the floor striker area is clean of any debris that would prevent the seat from latching 2 With assistance position the seat in the vehicle 3 Align the front hooks to the LH RH front striker pins prior to lowering the rear latch mechanism and aligning them with the rear striker pins 4 Engage the front LH RH hooks to the LH RH front striker pins 97 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints b After the front LH RH hooks are engaged to the LH RH front striker pins pull LH RH seat latch release straps to allow engagement of the latch to the striker pins Refer to the illustration in To remove the rear seats above 6 Pull push seat back forward backward to check for proper seat installation WARNING Always latch the vehicle seat to the floor whether the seat is occupied or empty If not latched the seat may cause injury during a sudden stop WARNING Do not hang or attach any cargo to the release
250. places an additional load on your vehicle s engine transmission axle brakes tires and suspension Inspect these components carefully after any towing operation Do not exceed trailer weight of 5 000 Ib 2 268 kg when towing with bumper only WARNING Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label WARNING Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could result in engine damage transmission damage structural damage loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover and personal injury Preparing to tow Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is properly attached to your vehicle Contact your authorized dealer or a reliable trailer dealer as soon as possible if you require assistance Hitches Do not use or install hitches that clamp onto the bumper or to the axle Underbody hitches are acceptable if installed properly Safety chains Always connect the trailer s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch To connect the trailer s safety chains cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners If you use a rental trailer follow the instructions that the rental agency gives to you Do not attach safety chains to the bumper Trailer brakes Electric brakes and manual automatic or surge type trailer brakes are safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer s
251. played and accompanied by a single chime when a trailer connection was determined and then a disconnection either intentionally or unintentionally has been sensed during a given ignition cycle It is also displayed if a truck or trailer wiring fault occurs causing the trailer to appear disconnected This message is also displayed during manual activation without a trailer connected 2 Manual control lever Slide the control lever to the left to activate power to the trailer s electric brakes independent of the tow vehicle s brakes see the following Procedure for adjusting GAIN section for instructions on proper use of this feature If the manual control is activated while the brake is also applied the greater of the two inputs determines the power sent to the trailer brakes e Stop Lamps Activating the TBC manual control lever will illuminate both the trailer brake lamps and the tow vehicle brake lamps except the Center High Mount Stop Lamp presuming proper trailer electrical connection Pressing the vehicle brake pedal will also illuminate both trailer and vehicle brake lamps Procedure for adjusting GAIN The GAIN setting is used to set the TBC for the specific towing condition and should be changed as towing conditions change Changes to towing conditions include trailer load vehicle load road conditions and weather The GAIN should be set to provide the maximum trailer braking assistance while ensuring the trailer wheels do no
252. r bystander Highway hazards No matter how carefully you drive there s always the possibility that you may eventually have a flat tire on the highway Drive slowly to the closest safe area out of traffic This may further damage the flat tire but your safety is more important If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving or you suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged immediately reduce your speed Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road Stop and inspect the tires for damage If a tire is under inflated or damaged deflate it remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel If you cannot detect a cause have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected Tire and wheel alignment A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires If your vehicle seems to pull to one side when you re driving the wheels may be out of alignment Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment periodically Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer Front wheel drive FWD vehicles and those with an independent rear suspension if equipped may require alignment of all four wheels The tires should also be balanced periodically An unbalanced tire and wheel assembly may
253. r illuminates the OBD II system has detected a malfunction Temporary malfunctions may cause the Service engine soon X Y indicator to illuminate Examples are 1 The vehicle has run out of fuel the engine may misfire or run poorly 2 Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel the engine may misfire or run poorly 3 The fuel cap may not have been securely tightened See Fuel filler cap in this chapter 292 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 4 Driving through deep water the electrical system may be wet These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank with good quality fuel properly tightening the fuel cap or letting the electrical system dry out After three driving cycles without these or any other temporary malfunctions present the Service engine soon indicator should stay off the next time the engine is started A driving cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city highway driving No additional vehicle service is required If the Service engine soon X Y indicator remains on have your vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity Although some malfunctions detected by the OBD II may not have symptoms that are apparent continued driving with the Service engine soon C indicator on can result in increased emissions lower fuel economy reduced engine and transmission smoothness and lead to more costly repairs Readi
254. rack mode the system will display and play the structure as if it were only one level deep all mp3 files will be played regardless of being in a specific folder In folder mode the system will only play the mp3 files in the current folder Satellite radio information if equipped Satellite radio channels SIRIUS broadcasts a variety of music news sports weather traffic and entertainment satellite radio channels For more information and a complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels visit www sirius com in the United States www sirius canada ca in Canada or call SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 Satellite radio reception factors To receive the satellite signal your vehicle has been equipped with a satellite radio antenna located on the roof of your vehicle The vehicle roof provides the best location for an unobstructed open view of the sky a requirement of a satellite radio system Like AM FM there are several factors that can affect satellite radio reception performance e Antenna obstructions For optimal reception performance keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build up and keep luggage and other material as far away from the antenna as possible 38 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Terrain Hills mountains tall buildings bridges tunnels freeway overpasses parking garages dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception Station overload Whe
255. railer towing in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter The Electronic Stability Control system may be deactivated in certain situations See the Switching Off AdvanceTrac with RSC 9 section following Roll Stability Control RSC Roll Stability Control RSC may help to maintain roll stability of the vehicle during adverse maneuvers RSC operates by detecting the vehicle s roll motion and the rate at which it changes and by applying the brakes to one or more wheels individually During an event that activates the Roll Stability Control RSC9 the sliding car icon 4 in the instrument cluster will flash Certain adverse driving maneuvers may activate the Roll Stability Control system which include e Emergency lane change e Taking a turn too fast e Quick maneuvering to avoid an accident pedestrian or obstacle The Roll Stability Control system may be deactivated in certain situations See the Switching Off AdvanceTrac with RSC section following 201 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Switching Off AdvanceTrac with RSC If the vehicle is stuck in snow mud or sand and seems to lose engine power switching off certain features of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system may be beneficial because the wheels are allowed to spin This will restore full engine power and will enhance momentum through the obstacle To switch off the AdvanceTrac with RSC system partially pres
256. railer towing and when engine braking is required e To return to O D Overdrive press the transmission control switch The O D OFF lamp will not be illuminated e O D Overdrive is automatically returned each time the key is turned off 2 Second This position allows for second gear only e Provides engine braking 208 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving e Use to start up on slippery roads e To return to Overdrive move the gearshift lever into the Overdrive position e Selecting 2 Second at higher speeds will cause the transmission to downshift to second gear at the appropriate vehicle speed 1 First e Provides maximum engine braking e Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever e Will not downshift into 1 First at high speeds allows for 1 First when vehicle reaches slower speeds Forced downshifts e Allowed in Overdrive or Drive e Depress the accelerator to the floor e Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear Understanding the shift positions of the 5 speed automatic transmission if equipped 5 4L and 6 8L gasoline engines only P RNO21 noe MM This vehicle is equipped with an adaptive Transmission Shift Strategy Adaptive Shift Strategy offers the optimal transmission operation and shift quality When the vehicle s battery has been disconnected for any type of service or repair the transmission will need to relearn the normal
257. rcass tires with a remote air fill with the person inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft 8 66 m away from the tire wheel assembly Important Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road tires are replaced on your vehicle It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be replaced as a pair The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels if equipped are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company may affect the operation of your Tire Pressure Monitoring System if equipped If the TPMS indicator is flashing your TPMS is malfunctioning Your replacement tire might be incompatible with your TPMS or some component of the TPMS may be damaged if equipped Safety practices Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety e Observe posted speed limits e Avoid fast starts stops and turns e Avoid potholes and objects on the road 147 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading e Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking WARNING If your vehicle is stuck in snow mud sand etc do not rapidly spin the tires spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause an explosion A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds WARNING Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph 56 km h The tires may fail and injure a passenger o
258. re approaches freezing ethanol fuel distributors should supply winter grade ethanol same as with unleaded gasoline If summer grade ethanol is used in cold weather conditions 0 F to 32 F 18 C to 0 C you may experience increased cranking times rough idle or hesitation until the engine has warmed up 192 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving You may experience a decrease in peak performance when the engine is cold when operating on Egs ethanol Do not crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time as starter damage may occur If the engine fails to start turn the key to off and wait 30 seconds before trying again Do not use starting fluid such as ether in the air intake system Such fluid could cause immediate explosive damage to the engine and possible personal injury If you should experience cold weather starting problems on Eg ethanol and neither an alternative brand of Eg ethanol nor an engine block heater is available the addition of unleaded gasoline to your tank will improve cold starting performance Your vehicle is designed to operate on Egs ethanol alone unleaded gasoline alone or any mixture of the two See Choosing the right fuel in the Maintenance amd Specifications chapter for more information on ethanol Guarding against exhaust fumes Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes Take precautions to avoid its dangerous effects WARNING If you smell exhaust fume
259. re to replace wiper blades when they appear worn or do not function properly e Do not use abrasives as they may cause scratches e Do not use fuel kerosene or paint thinner to clean any parts If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion clean the outer surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild abrasive cleaning solution After cleaning rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield with water 261 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning INSTRUMENT PANEL INTERIOR TRIM AND CLUSTER LENS Clean the instrument panel interior trim areas and cluster lens with a clean and damp white cotton cloth then with a clean and dry white cotton cloth you may also use Motorcraft Dash amp Vinyl Cleaner ZC 38 A on the instrument panel and interior trim areas e Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion of the instrument panel The dull finish in this area helps protect the driver from undesirable windshield reflection e Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted surfaces e Do not use household or glass c
260. result in irregular tire wear Tire rotation Rotating your tires at the recommended interval as indicated in the scheduled maintenance information that comes with your vehicle will help your tires wear more evenly providing better tire performance and longer tire life 148 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading e Rear Wheel Drive RWD vehicles Four Wheel Drive 4WD All Wheel Drive AWD vehicles front tires at top of diagram NN NNANNAAN NN XN NUN ET NNNNNANANN NNNNNNANAN Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires Note If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check for and correct any wheel misalignment tire imbalance or mechanical problem involved before tire rotation Note Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire wheel A dissimilar spare tire wheel is defined as a spare tire and or wheel that is different in brand size or appearance from the road tires and wheels If you have a dissimilar spare tire wheel it is intended for temporary use only and should not be used in a tire rotation Note After having your tires rotated inflation pressure must be checked and adjusted to the vehicle requirements WARNING If the tire label shows different tire pressures for the front and rear tires and the vehicle is equipped with TPMS tire pressure monitoring system then the settings for the TPMS senso
261. rimary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so Accessory delay Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay With this feature the radio and certain electrical accessories may be used for up to ten minutes after the ignition is turned off or until either front door is opened lLA W runeDisc selector In radio mode press to manually go up A or down v the radio frequency Press and hold for a fast advance through radio frequencies In menu mode use to select various settings In CD MPS3 mode press to select the desired disc 27 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems In CATEGORY mode if equipped press to scroll through the list of available SIRIUS channel categories Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 2 Phone Pressing Phone results in NO PHONE a message shown in display 3 MENU Press repeatedly to access to the following settings Setting the clock Press until SELECT HOURS or SELECT MINS is displayed Press A IV to adjust the hours minutes SATELLITE RADIO MENU if equipped Press MENU when satellite radio mode is active to access Press OK to enter into the satellite radio menu Press
262. risk of a rollover crash increases as the number of people and load in the vehicle increase This increased risk occurs because the passenger weight and load raises the vehicle s center of gravity and causes it to shift rearward As a result the van has less resistance to rollover and handles differently from other commonly driven passenger vehicles making it more difficult to control in an emergency situation Placing any load on the roof also raises the center of gravity and increases the potential for rollover The van should be operated by an experienced driver An organization that owns a 15 passenger van should select one or two experienced drivers to drive the van on a regular basis These drivers will gain valuable experience handling the van This experience will help make each trip safer The van should be operated at a safe speed which in some conditions may be less than the posted speed limit 204 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving Further all occupants should be properly restrained Most people killed in rollover crashes were unbelted Occupants can dramatically reduce their risk of being killed or seriously injured in a rollover crash by simply using their seat belts Organizations that own 15 passenger vans should have a written seat belt use policy Drivers should be responsible for enforcing the policy Emergency maneuvers e n an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp
263. rized dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions and equipment for hooking up trailer lamps Using a step bumper if equipped The rear bumper is equipped with an integral hitch and only requires a ball with a one inch 25 4 mm shank diameter The bumper has a 5 000 Ib 2 270 kg trailer weight and 500 Ib 227 kg tongue weight capacity If it is necessary to relocate the trailer hitch ball position a frame mounted trailer hitch must be installed 187 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Driving while you tow When towing a trailer e To ensure proper break in of powertrain components do not trailer tow during the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km of a new vehicle e To ensure proper break in of powertrain components during the first 500 miles 800 km of trailer towing drive no faster than 70 mph 113 km h with no full throttle starts Turn off the speed control The speed control may shut off automatically when you are towing on long steep grades Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer e To eliminate excessive shifting use a lower gear This will also assist in transmission cooling e Anticipate stops and brake gradually When descending long steep downhill grades always use a lower gear to provide engine braking to save wear on brakes Use Drive Overdrive OFF on moderately steep hills Second 2 on steep hills
264. rking brake is on the transmission Therefore the vehicle will not be prevented from moving when a rear wheel is lifted even if the parking brake is applied Be sure to block both directions of the wheel that is diagonally opposite to the wheel that is being lifted 2 Remove the spare tire and jack from the storage location 236 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies e the jack is located in the rear right hand side of the cargo area 3 Remove any wheel trim Insert the tapered end of the lug nut wrench behind wheel covers or hubcaps and twist off 4 Loosen the wheel nut by pulling up on the handle of the lug nut wrench about one half turn counterclockwise Do not remove the wheel lug nuts until you raise the tire off the ground WARNING When one of the rear wheels is off the ground the transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping off the jack even if the transmission is in P Park automatic transmission or R Reverse manual transmission To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you change the tire be sure that the parking brake is set and the diagonally opposite wheel is blocked Replacing the tire 1 Assemble the jack handle sections together and lock into the jack Use the jack handle to slide the jack under the vehicle 237 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies WARNING To les
265. rom its heating position when it is ready to be used Note Improper use of the lighter can cause damage not covered by your warranty and can result in fire or serious injury POWER WINDOWS WARNING Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let children play with the power windows They may seriously injure themselves WARNING When closing the power windows you should verify they are free of obstructions and ensure that children and or pets are not in the proximity of the window openings 62 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Press and pull the window switches to open and close windows e Push down to the first detent and hold the switch to open AUTO e Pull up to the first detent and hold the switch to close SS One touch down Allows the driver s window to open fully without holding the control down Push the switch completely down to the second detent and release quickly The window will open fully Momentarily press the switch to any position to stop the window operation Accessory delay With accessory delay the window switches and radio may be used for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the off position or until any door is opened INTERIOR MIRROR The interior rear view mirror has two pivot points on the support arm which lets you adjust the mirror UP or DOWN and from SIDE to SIDE WARNING Do not
266. rom the road tires and wheels and can be one of three types 1 T type mini spare This spare tire begins with the letter T for tire size and may have Temporary Use Only molded in the sidewall 2 Full size dissimilar spare with label on wheel This spare tire has a label on the wheel that states THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR TEMPORARY USE ONLY When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above do not e Exceed 50 mph 80 km h e Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the Safety Compliance Label e Tow a trailer e Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire 233 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies e Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time e Use commercial car washing equipment e ry to repair the dissimilar spare tire Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel location can lead to impairment of the following e Handling stability and braking performance e Comfort and noise e Ground clearance and parking at curbs e Winter weather driving capability e Wet weather driving capability 3 Full size dissimilar spare without label on wheel When driving with the full size dissimilar spare tire wheel do not e Exceed 70 mph 113 km h e Use more than one dissimilar spare tire wheel at a time e Use commercial car washing equipment e Use snow chains on the end of t
267. roper loading of your vehicle and or trailer to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating capability with or without a trailer Properly loading your vehicle will provide maximum return of vehicle design performance Before loading your vehicle familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle s weight ratings with or without a trailer from the vehicle s Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label Base Curb Weight is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all standard equipment It does not include passengers cargo or optional equipment Vehicle Curb Weight is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket equipment 167 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading PAYLOAD Payload is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the vehicle is carrying The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found on the Tire Label on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire Label Look for THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX Ib for maximum payload The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant If any aftermarket or authorized dealer installed equipment has been installed on the vehicl
268. rs need to be updated Always perform the TPMS reset procedure after tire rotation If the system is not reset it may not provide a low tire pressure warning when necessary See the TPMS reset procedure in this chapter 149 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading e DRW Six tire rotation If your vehicle is equipped with dual rear wheels it is recommended that Y the front and rear tires in pairs be rotated only side to side We do not recommend splitting up the dual rear wheels Rotate them side to side as a set pair After tire rotation inflation pressures must be adjusted for the tires new positions in accordance with vehicle m requirements Y UI dii Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires Note If your tires show uneven wear ask your authorized dealer to check for and correct any wheel misalignment tire imbalance or mechanical problem involved before tire rotation Note Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire wheel A dissimilar spare tire wheel is defined as a spare tire and or wheel that is different in brand size or appearance from the road tires and wheels If you have a dissimilar spare tire wheel it is intended for temporary use only and should not be used in a tire rotation Note After having your tires rotated inflation pressure must be checked and adjusted to the vehicle requirements INFORMATION CO
269. ructions 173 Locks autoloGk 32 5 edere 78 CLO OTS sei diede nece y eode 78 Lubricant specifications 303 TUS TUS 35er drin 241 Lumbar support seats 92 M Message center sses 69 warning messages 74 MATT OTS aper teo exem 63 64 automatic dimming rearview MUTOR ae Et 63 Told AWAY isset meia 65 side view mirrors power 64 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Index Motorcraft parts 264 281 302 N Navigation system 41 o Octane rating ssss 286 Oil see Engine oil 269 P Parking brake 196 Parts see Motorcraft parts 302 Power distribution box see FUSES 4 228 Power door locks 78 Power mirrors sss 64 Power DOINU csc acie ei et 61 Power steering 203 fluid checking and adding 294 fluid refill capacity 303 fluid specifications 303 Power Windows sss 62 Preparing to drive your vehicle 2 2 Bisnis teen 203 R Radio eet eene 20 22 27 Recommendations for attaching safety restraints for children seeren REOR 119 RelayS8 ararnar 225 Remote entry system 82 illuminated entry 86 319 Index locking unlocking CLOOTS NN DE 78 88 84 PANIC
270. ry eee ee E 350 Extended Cutaway 138 wheelbase single rear wheel 9600 GVWR 10600 E 350 Cutaway 138 wheelbase dual rear wheel 10000 GVWR 13000 pure See 18500 op eee eee E 350 Cutaway 158 wheelbase dual rear wheel 10000 GVWR 13000 5897 Ui id H 18500 8391 DU oe E 350 Cutaway 138 wheelbase dual rear wheel 11500 GVWR 13000 5897 Lih iil iiec 18500 cup MM TO 178 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading GCWR Gross Combined Weight Rating Trailer Weights Rear Maximum Maximum EUM Loaded frontal Reo Taro Trailer Weight trailer ft lb kg m E 350 Cutaway 158 wheelbase dual rear wheel 11500 GVWR 13000 soy p RPM T ee 18500 ep eer Seem E 350 Cutaway 158 wheelbase dual rear wheel 12500 GVWR 13000 aor C0 O99 89 6 55 18500 CET MN Mica NN ad E 350 Cutaway 176 wheelbase dual rear wheel 10000 GVWR 13000 pire p Mee eM 18500 8391 pii guid bs gu E 350 Cutaway 176 wheelbase dual rear wheel 12500 GVWR 13000 6897 7700 3493 60 5 52 18500 E 350 Stripped Chassis 138 wheelbase single rear wheel 9000 GVWR 2 13000 13000 179 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading GCWR Gross Combined Weight Rating Trailer Weights Rear Maximum Maximum RUM Loaded frontal proce
271. s 90 Headlamps 45 GITTUTIB A E E E 48 bulb specifications 51 daytime running lights 45 flash TO Pass 2 5 enit 46 High bear sce 45 replacing bulbs 52 turning on and off 45 Heating heater only system 42 44 heating and air conditioning SYSLOIDE 3 nueevetoscas vq tuts te ees FOO M 266 I Igri tlDU EPEE Eris 190 310 Illuminated visor mirror 58 Infant seats see Safety seats 121 Inspection maintenance I M DeSUIg sue cie vem etin nicae EUR 293 Instrument panel CLEANING 3 262 GIUSLBE Soc eeu ermsetevec iei dgeis 12 lighting up panel and IBUOEIOE 41er ie De Rei 46 J Jacke rsen 232 POSTEIONING M RR 232 SUOTASE 2 eere retenti otra niue 232 Jump starting your vehicle 242 K Keyless entry system aUtoloGk rere rts 78 KEYS E 88 positions of the ignition 190 L Lamps bulb replacement specifications chart 51 daytime running light 45 lieadlamps 2e ts 45 headlamps flash to pass 46 instrument panel dimming 46 interior lamps 49 replacing bulbs 52 LATCH anchors 124 Lights warning and indicator 12 anti lock brakes ABS 196 Load limits eeessss 167 Loading inst
272. s 268 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES 1 Pull the wiper arm away from the vehicle Turn the blade at an angle from the wiper arm Push the lock tab to release the blade and pull the 2 e 9 wiper blade down toward the windshield to remove it from the arm 2 Attach the new wiper to the wiper arm and press it into place until a click is heard Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the windshield Refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning chapter To prolong the life of the wiper blades it is highly recommended to scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers The layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the wiper rubber element ENGINE OIL Y7 Checking the engine oil Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for checking the engine oil 1 Make sure the vehicle is on level ground 2 Turn the engine off and wait a few minutes for the oil to drain into the oil pan 3 Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P Park 4 Open the hood Protect yourself from engine heat 269 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 5 Locate and carefully remove the
273. s then release 163 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading 5 Turn the ignition to off DO NOT remove the key ei 6 Cycle the ignition from off to on three 3 times ending in on DO NOT start the engine If the reset mode has been entered successfully the horn will sound once the TPMS indicator 1 will flash and the message center will display TRAIN LEFT FRONT TIRE If after repeated attempts to enter the reset mode the horn does not sound the TPMS indicator D does not flash and the message center does not display TRAIN LEFT FRONT TIRE contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible 164 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading 7 Train the TPMS sensors in the tires using the following TPMS reset sequence starting with the left front tire in the following clockwise order 1 Left front tire Front driver s side 2 Right front tire Front passenger s side 3 Right rear tire Rear passenger s side 4 Left rear tire Rear driver s side 8 Left front tire Place the TPMS reset tool against the left front tire where the tire meets the rim opposite from the valve stem 1 as shown This is where the sensor is located inside the rim The tool needs to be held against the tire sidewall opposite the valve stem as illustrated with the arrow on the tool pointing towards the rim do not use the tool with th
274. s and hold a preset button until sound returns You can save up to 18 stations six in AM six in FM1 and FM2 5 AM FM Press AM FM to select B AM FM1 FM2 frequency band 6 ON OFF Volume Press VOL PUSH VOL PUSH to turn ON OFF Turn VOL PUSH to increase decrease volume 7 CLK Clock Press CLK to toggle between displaying the radio Ne frequency and the clock setting 21 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Setting the clock Press and hold CLK until the hours begin to flash Press A IV i SEEK to manually increase decrease the hours Press CLK again to set the minutes using A IV lt q SEEK P to manually increase decrease the minutes Allow 10 seconds to pass to confirm that the time has been set AM FM Single CD MP3 sound system if equipped 18 o 09 Fx 9 Oe Seo eee Geen TT see REW FF 4FOLDER FOLDER SHUFFLE I x 1 2 3 4 5 6 WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The driver s primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so MPS eo Accessory delay Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay Wit
275. s electrical system 3 Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle making sure the two vehicles do not touch Set the parking brake on both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving parts 4 Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before you attach the battery cables Ensure that vent caps are tight and level 5 Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical surges Turn all other accessories off Connecting the jumper cables 1 Connect the positive jumper cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery Note In the illustrations lightning bolts are used to designate the assisting boosting battery 243 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 2 Connect the other end of the positive cable to the positive terminal of the assisting battery 3 Connect the negative cable to the negative terminal of the assisting battery 244 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 4 Make the final connection of the negative cable to an exposed metal part of the stalled vehicle s engine away from the battery and the carburetor fuel injection system Do not use fuel lines engine rocker covers or the intake manifold as grounding points WARNING Do not connect the end of the second cable to the n
276. s inside your vehicle have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes Important ventilating information If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of time open the windows at least one inch 2 5 cm or adjust the heating or air conditioning to bring in fresh air ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED An engine block heater warms the engine coolant which aids in starting and allows the heater defroster system to respond quickly If your vehicle is equipped with this system your equipment includes a heater element which is installed in your engine block and a wire harness which allows the user to connect the system to a grounded 120 volt a c electrical source The block heater system is most effective when outdoor temperatures reach below 0 F 18 C For flexible fuel vehicles if operating with Egs ethanol an engine block heater must be used if ambient temperature is below 0 F 18 C 193 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving See Cold weather starting in the Driving chapter for more information on starting with ethanol WARNING Failure to follow engine block heater instructions could result in property damage or physical injury WARNING To reduce the risk of electrical shock do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged cheater adapters Prior to using the engine block heater follow these re
277. s must be mounted on the vehicle Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage to the TPMS sensors refer to Tire pressure monitoring system TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter Replace the spare 232 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies tire with a road tire as soon as possible During repairing or replacing of the flat tire have the authorized dealer inspect the TPMS sensor for damage WARNING The use of tire sealants may damage your Tire Pressure Monitoring System and should not be used WARNING Refer to Tire pressure monitoring system TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for important information If the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged it will no longer function Dissimilar spare tire wheel information WARNING Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control injury or death If you have a dissimilar spare tire wheel then it is intended for temporary use only This means that if you need to use it you should replace it as soon as possible with a road tire wheel that is the same size and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by Ford If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged it should be replaced rather than repaired A dissimilar spare tire wheel is defined as a spare tire and or wheel that is different in brand size or appearance f
278. s not provide control play pause etc over the attached portable music player b For safety reasons connecting or adjusting the settings on your portable music player should not be attempted while the vehicle is moving Also the portable music player should be stored in a secure location such as the center console or the glove box when the vehicle is in motion The audio extension cable must be long enough to allow the portable music player to be safely stored while the vehicle is in motion GENERAL AUDIO INFORMATION Radio frequencies AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications Commission FCC and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications Commission CRTC Those frequencies are AM 530 540 1700 1710 KHz FM 87 7 87 9 107 7 107 9 MHz 35 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Radio reception factors There are three factors that can affect radio reception e Distance strength The further you travel from an FM station the weaker the signal and the weaker the reception Terrain Hills mountains tall buildings power lines electric fences traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception Station overload When you pass a broadcast tower a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency is displayed CD CD player care Do e Handle discs by their edges only a Never touch the playin
279. s the AdvanceTrac with RSC Off button below 20 mph 32 km h Full features of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system can be restored by pressing the AdvanceTrac with RSC Off button again or if the vehicle is above 20 mph 32 km h or by turning off and restarting the engine If you switch off the AdvanceTrac with RSC system below 20 mph 32 km h the sliding car icon n will illuminate steadily Pressing the AdvanceTrac with RSC Off button again or if the vehicle is above 20 mph 32 km h will turn off the sliding car n icon The switch will not allow partial AdvanceTrac with RSC system disabling above 20 mph 32 km h In R Reverse ABS and the Engine and Brake Traction Control features will continue to function however ESC and RSC are disabled AdvanceTrac with RSC Features E Sliding m utton action functions r SIC ESL Control Deratilt at during bulb Enabled Enabled Enabled start up check Disabled Button pressed Enabled Enabled below momentarily 20 mph 32 km h Button pressed again after eic a Enabled Enabled Enabled driving above illuminated 20 mph 32 km h 202 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving STEERING To help prevent damage to the power steering system e Never hold the steering wheel at its furthest turning points until it stops for more than a few seconds when the engine is running e Do not operate the vehicle with
280. s the tire is removed The pressure sensor is located opposite 180 degrees from the valve stem Care must be taken when changing the tire to avoid damaging the sensor It is recommended that you always have your tires serviced by an authorized dealer The tire pressure should be checked periodically at least monthly using an accurate tire gauge refer to Inflating your tres in this chapter 157 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Understanding your Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitoring System measures pressure in your four road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle The Low Tire Warning Lamp will turn ON if the tire pressure is significantly low Once the light is illuminated your tires are under inflated and need to be inflated to the manufacturer s recommended tire pressure Even if the light turns ON and a short time later turns OFF your tire pressure still needs to be checked Visit www checkmytires org for additional information When your temporary spare tire is installed When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary spare the TPMS system will continue to identify an issue to remind you that the damaged road wheel tire needs to be repaired and put back on your vehicle To restore the full functionality of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System have the damaged road wheel tire repaired and remoun
281. se 239 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 5 Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug nuts in the following pattern Refer to Wheel lug nut torque specifications later in this chapter for the proper lug nut torque specification WARNING Never use 1 wheels or lug nuts different than the original equipment as this could damage the wheel or mounting system This damage could allow the wheels to come off while the vehicle is being driven 6 Install any wheel covers ornaments or hub caps Make sure they are snapped in place 7 Stow the jack handle and lug wrench 8 Unblock the wheels Stowing the flat spare tire Note Failure to follow spare tire stowage instructions may result in failure of cable or loss of spare tire 1 Lay the tire on the ground with the valve stem facing in the direction specified on the Tire Changing Instructions located with the jack hardware 2 Slide the wheel partially under the vehicle and install the retainer through the wheel center Pull on the cable to align the components at the end of the cable 3 Turn the jack handle clockwise until the tire is raised to its stowed position underneath the vehicle The effort to turn the jack handle increases significantly and the spare tire carrier ratchets or slips when the tire is raised to the maximum tightness Tighten to the best of your ability to the point where the ratchet slip occurs if possi
282. seat cushion Press to raise or lower the front S portion of the seat cushion N Press to raise or lower the rear portion of the seat cushion 92 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Press the control to move the seat forward backward up or down REAR SEATS Rear captains chair adjust passenger side only Pull the lever to adjust the seat forward or backward 93 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Quick release captains chair 7 passenger configuration second row only To remove the seat 1 Disengage the lap shoulder belt from the seat by inserting a key or small screwdriver into the slot in the detachable anchor and lifting upward 2 Pull the seat latch handle then pull the seat toward the right side of the vehicle to disengage four pins from the floor mount 3 Remove the seat To install the seat WARNING Check to see that the seat and seatback is latched securely in position Keep floor area free of objects that would prevent proper seat engagement Never attempt to adjust the seat while the vehicle is in motion WARNING Ensure that the seat is latched to the vehicle floor by pushing pulling on the seat If not latched the seat may cause injury during a sudden stop 94 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 1
283. sen the risk of personal injury do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while changing a tire Do not start the engine when your vehicle is on the jack The jack is only meant for changing the tire 2 Position the jack to raise the front or rear wheel e Never use the front or rear differential as a jacking point Rear axle jacking points All models except E 350 Dual Rear Wheel DRW and E 450 Rear axle jacking points E 350 Dual Rear Wheel DRW and E 450 238 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Front axle jacking points Place the jack under the pin on the front surface of the front axle Do not place the jack under or on the steering linkage Raise the jack until the wheel is completely off the ground Turn jack handle clockwise if your vehicle is equipped with a screw type jack or pump the jack if equipped with a hydraulic jack Remove the lug nuts with the lug nut wrench Replace the flat tire with the spare tire If your vehicle has single rear wheels thread the lug nuts on the studs with the beveled face toward the wheel If your vehicle has dual rear wheels thread the two element swiveling lug nuts on the studs with the flange facing toward the wheel 3 Use the lug nut wrench to screw the lug nut snugly against the wheel 4 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle counterclockwi
284. set the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph 5 km h GAUGES Speedometer Indicates the current vehicle speed Engine coolant temperature gauge Indicates engine coolant temperature At normal operating temperature the needle will be in the normal range between H and C If it enters the red section the engine is overheating Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible switch off the engine and let the engine cool 17 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster WARNING Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot Odometer Registers the total miles kilometers of the vehicle Refer to Message center in the OO mi Driver Controls chapter on how to switch the display from Metric to English Trip odometer Registers the miles kilometers of individual journeys TRIP A XXXX mi Press the SELECT RESET stem 0 0 mi once to switch from the odometer to the trip odometer Press the stem again to select Trip A and Trip B features To reset the trip press and hold the stem again until the trip reading is 0 0 miles Tachometer Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute Driving with your tachometer pointer continuously at the top of the scale may damage the engine Battery voltage gauge Indicates the battery voltage when the ignition is in the on positio
285. shift strategy parameters much like having to reset your radio stations when your vehicle battery has been disconnected The Adaptive Transmission Strategy allows the transmission to relearn these operating parameters This learning process could take several transmission upshifts and downshifts during this learning process slightly firmer shifts may occur After this learning process normal shift feel and shift scheduling will resume P Park This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from turning 209 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving To put your vehicle in gear e Start the engine e Depress the brake pedal e Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear To put your vehicle in P Park e Come to a complete stop e Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P Park WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle R Reverse With the gearshift lever in R Reverse the vehicle will move backward Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R Reverse N Neutral With the gearshift lever in N Neutral the vehicle can be started and is free to roll Hold the brake pedal down while in this position D Overdrive with Tow Haul OFF D Overdrive with Tow Haul OFF is the normal driving position
286. side air is shut out and the climate system is turned off MIX Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and the floor vents Q7 Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents Operating tips e To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather place the air flow selector in the 47 position To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle during cold or warm weather do not drive with the air flow selector in the OFF position e Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the air flow to the back seats e Remove any snow ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield To aid in side window defogging demisting in cold weather 1 Select MIX 2 Set the temperature control to maintain comfort 3 Set the fan speed to HI 42 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls MANUAL HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED 1 Fan speed adjustment Controls 9 9 the volume of air circulated in the Bre jest vehicle E em TN Controls the temperature of the airflow in the vehicle 3 Air flow selections Controls the direction of the airflow in the vehicle Also controls the airflow for the rear auxiliary system if equipped See the following for a brief description on each control MAX A C Uses recirculated air to cool the vehicle Air flows from the instrument panel vents only If equippe
287. ssional Strength Carpet amp Upholstery Cleaner ZC 54 Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover U S only ZC 14 Motorcraft Tire Clean and Shine ZC 28 Motorcraft Triple Clean U S only ZC 13 Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner ZC 23 Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner Canada only CXC 93 Motorcraft Wash and Wax Canada only CXC 95 Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner ZC 37 A 264 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS To help you service your vehicle we provide scheduled maintenance information which makes tracking routine service easy If your vehicle requires professional service your authorized dealer can provide the necessary parts and service Check your Warranty Guide Customer Information Guide to find out which parts and services are covered Use only recommended fuels lubricants fluids and service parts conforming to specifications Motorcraft parts are designed and built to provide the best performance in your vehicle PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE e Do not work on a hot engine e Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts e Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed space unless you are sure you have enough ventilation e Keep all open flames and other burning cigarettes material away from the battery and all fuel related parts Working with the engine off 1 Set the parking bra
288. ssistance coverage you may purchase extended coverage prior to your Basic Warranty s Roadside Assistance expiring For more information and enrollment contact 1 877 294 2582 or visit our website at www ford ca Using roadside assistance Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your wallet for quick reference In the United States this card is found in the Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment In Canada the card is found in the Owner Information Guide in the glove compartment U S Ford Mercury and Lincoln vehicle customers who require Roadside Assistance call 1 800 241 3673 Canadian customers who require roadside assistance call 1 800 665 2006 Motorhome customers in the U S and Canada should contact 1 800 444 3311 If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself Ford Motor Company will reimburse a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest dealership within 35 miles To obtain reimbursement information U S Ford Mercury and Lincoln vehicle customers call 1 800 241 3673 Customers will be asked to submit their original receipts Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information call 1 800 665 2006 HAZARD FLASHER CONTROL A The hazard flasher is located on the steering column just behind the steering wheel The hazard flashers will operate when the ignition is in any position or if the key is not in the ignition Push in the flasher control and all front
289. st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems and the display will read SONG DELETED If you do not want to delete the currently listed song press A IV to select either RETURN or CANCEL Note If there are no songs presently saved the display will read NO SONGS e DELETE ALL SONGS Press OK to delete all song s from the system s memory The display will read ARE YOU SURE Press OK to confirm deletion of all saved songs and the display will read ALL DELETED Note If there are no songs presently saved the display will read NO SONGS e ENABLE ALERTS DISABLE ALERTS Press OK to enable disable the satellite alert status which alerts you when your selected songs are playing on a satellite radio channel The system default is disabled SONG ALERTS ENABLED DISABLED will appear in the display The menu listing will display the opposite state For example if you have chosen to enable the song alerts the menu listing will read DISABLE as the alerts are currently on so your other option is to turn them off Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability AUTOSET Press MENU until the display reads AUTOSET Autoset allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without losing your original manually set preset stations for AM FM1 FM2 Use A IV to turn on off When the six strongest stations are filled the station stored in preset 1 will begin playing
290. st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications TRANSMISSION CODE DESIGNATIONS MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO DATE 12 01 GVWR XXXXLB XXXXKG FRONT GAWR XXXXLB XXXXKG FRONT GAWR XXXXLB XXXXKG WITH XXXXXXXXXXX TIRES WITH XXXXXXXXXXX TIRES XXXX XX RIMS XXXX XX RIMS AT XXXXkPa XX PSKCOLD AT XXXXkPa XX PSI COLD THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTUER SHOWN ABOVE VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXK TYPE XXX EXT PNT XX RC XX DSO XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXX XXXX XXXXXXX XX XX You can find a transmission code on the Safety Compliance Certification Label The following table tells you which transmission each code represents Four speed automatic overdrive 4R75E 0O Q O Five speed automatic TorqShift with Tow Haul Five speed automatic 5R110W Hi Torque B O 318 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Accessories GENUINE FORD ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE A wide selection of Genuine Ford Accessories are available for your vehicle through your local Ford or Ford of Canada dealer These quality accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs they are custom designed to complement the style and aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle In addition each accessory is made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Ford s rigorous engineering and safety specifications Ford Motor Company will re
291. st snugly near the center of the shoulder The drawings below compare the ideal fit center to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to the neck and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder The drawings below also show how the lap belt should be low and snug across the child s hips If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat placing a rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this condition Do not introduce any item thicker than this under the booster seat Check with the booster seat manufacturer s instructions The importance of shoulder belts Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child s head hitting a hard surface in a collision For this reason you should never use a booster seat with a lap belt only It is generally best to use a booster seat with lap shoulder belts in the back seat 134 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Move a child to a different seating location if the shoulder belt does not stay positioned on the shoulder during use Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the booster seat WARNING Never place or allow a child to place the shoulder belt under a child s arm or behind the back because it reduces the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision Child restraint and safety belt maintenance
292. st the vehicle seat back with knees bent comfortably at the edge of the seat cushion Can the child sit without slouching e Does the lap belt rest low across the hips e s the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest e Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip Types of booster seats There are generally two types of belt positioning booster seats backless and high back Always use booster seats in conjunction with the vehicle lap shoulder belt e Backless booster seats If your backless booster seat has a removable shield remove the shield If a vehicle seating position has a low seat back or no head restraint a backless booster seat may place your child s head as measured at the tops of the ears above the top of the seat In this case move the backless booster to another seating position with a higher seat back or head restraint and lap shoulder belts or consider using a high back booster seat High back booster seats If with a backless booster seat you cannot find a seating position that adequately supports your child s head a high back booster seat would be a better choice 133 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Children and booster seats vary in size and shape Choose a booster that keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips never up across the stomach and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and re
293. t from yellow to golden tan e Do not add mix an orange colored extended life coolant such as Motorcraft Specialty Orange Engine Coolant meeting Ford specification WSS M97B44 D or DEX COOL brand with the factory filled coolant Mixing Motorcraft Specialty Orange Engine Coolant or any orange colored extended life product such as DEX COOL brand with your factory filled coolant can result in degraded corrosion protection e A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added in case of emergency to reach a vehicle service location In this instance the cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50 50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible Water alone without engine coolant can cause engine damage from corrosion overheating or freezing e Do not use alcohol methanol brine or any engine coolants mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze coolant Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or freezing e Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant These can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine coolant 277 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non pressurized cap on the coolant recovery system add coolant to the coolant recovery reservoir when the engine is cool Add the proper mixture of coolant and water to the
294. t is too close to the inflating airbag and the risk of a fatal injury to the infant when the airbag inflates is substantial The vast majority of drivers and passengers are much safer with an airbag than without To do their job and reduce the risk of life threatening injuries airbags must open with great force and this force can pose a potentially deadly risk in some situations particularly when a front seat occupant is not properly buckled up The most effective way to reduce the risk of unnecessary airbag injuries without reducing the overall safety of the vehicle is to make sure all occupants are properly restrained in the vehicle especially in the front seat This provides the protection of safety belts and permits the airbags to provide the additional protection they were designed to provide If you choose to deactivate your airbag you are losing the very significant risk reducing benefits of the airbag and you are also reducing the effectiveness of the 114 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints safety belts because safety belts in modern vehicles are designed to work as a safety system with the airbags Read all airbag warning labels in the vehicle as well as the other important airbag instructions and warnings in this Owner s Guide NHTSA deactivation criteria excluding Canada 1 Infant An infant less than 1 year old must ride in the front seat because e the vehic
295. t lock when braking Locked trailer wheels may lead to trailer instability Note This should only be performed in a traffic free environment at speeds of approximately 20 25 mph 30 40 km h 185 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading 1 Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working condition functioning normally and properly adjusted See your trailer dealer if necessary 2 Hook up the trailer and make the electrical connections according to the trailer manufacturer s instructions 3 When a trailer with electric brakes is plugged in the TRAILER CONNECTED message will display in the instrument cluster message center 4 Use the GAIN adjustment buttons to increase or decrease the GAIN setting to the desired starting point A GAIN setting of 6 0 is a good starting point for heavier loads 5 In a traffic free environment tow the trailer on a dry level surface at a speed of 20 25 mph 30 40 km h and squeeze the manual control lever completely 6 If the trailer wheels lock up indicated by squealing tires reduce the GAIN setting if the trailer wheels turn freely increase the GAIN setting Repeat Steps 5 and 6 until the GAIN setting is at a point just below trailer wheel lock up If towing a heavier trailer trailer wheel lockup may not be attainable even with the maximum GAIN setting of 10 Explanation of instrument cluster warning messages The TBC interacts w
296. tain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling For information on transmission operation after the battery has been disconnected refer to Automatic transmission operation in the Driving chapter Auxiliary battery if equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a frame mounted auxiliary battery located on the passenger side frame rail behind the front passenger door This auxiliary battery is connected to the auxiliary battery relay so it is not used to start the vehicle 273 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Battery relearn Because your vehicle s engine is electronically controlled by a computer some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed the engine must relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and performance Flexible fuel vehicles FFV must also relearn the ethanol content of the fuel for optimum driveability and performance To begin this process 1 With the vehicle at a complete stop set the parking brake 2 Put the gearshift in P Park turn off all accessories and start the engine 3 Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature 4 Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute 5 Turn the A C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute 6 Release the parking brake With your foot on the brake pedal and wit
297. take their focus off the road The driver s primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so Accessory delay Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay which allows you to operate the radio and other electrical accessories for up to ten minutes after the ignition has been turned off or until either front door is opened LA V Press A V to manually go up or down the radio frequency Press and hold for a fast advance through radio frequencies Also use in AUDIO mode to gain access to various settings 20 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 2 AUDIO Press AUDIO repeatedly to gain access to the following settings BAL Balance Press AUDIO to reach the balance setting Use A Ww 4 SEEK P to adjust the audio between the left L and right R speakers FAD Fade If equipped with four speaker audio system Press AUDIO to reach the fade feature Use A IV lt q SEEK gt to adjust the audio between the front F and back B speakers TREB Treble Press to adjust the treble setting Use A V lt q SEEK P to adjust BASS Bass Press to adjust the bass setting Use A V lt q SEEK P to adjust 3 SEEK Press E SEEK to access the previous next strong station 4 Memory presets To set a station Select frequency band AM FM1 FM2 tune to a station pres
298. ted on your vehicle For additional information refer to Changing tires with TPMS in this section 158 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading When you believe your system is not operating properly The main function of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is to warn you when your tires need air It can also warn you in the event the system is no longer capable of functioning as intended Please refer to the following chart for information concerning your Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low Tire Possible Customer Action Required Pressure cause Warning Light Solid Warning Tire s 1 Check your tire pressure to ensure Light under inflated tires are properly inflated refer to Inflating your tres in this chapter 2 After inflating your tires to the manufacturer s recommended inflation pressure as shown on the Tire Label located on the edge of driver s door or the B Pillar the vehicle must be driven for at least two minutes over 20 mph 32 km h before the light will turn OFF Spare tire in Your temporary spare tire is in use use Repair the damaged road wheel tire and reinstall it on the vehicle to restore system functionality For a description on how the system functions refer to When your temporary spare tire is installed in this section TPMS If your tires are properly inflated and malfunction your spare tire is not in use and the light remains ON contact your
299. tely removing the fuel filler cap Otherwise fuel may spray out and injure you or others WARNING If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap excessive vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision which may result in serious personal injury 281 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications WARNING Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or mishandled WARNING Fuel ethanol and gasoline may contain benzene which is a cancer causing agent Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel Extinguish all smoking materials and any open flames before fueling your vehicle Always turn off the vehicle before fueling Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed Fuels such as gasoline and ethanol are highly toxic and if swallowed can cause death or permanent injury If fuel is swallowed call a physician immediately even if no symptoms are immediately apparent The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours Avoid inhaling fuel vapors Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation In severe cases excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious illness and permanent injury Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes If fuel is splashed in the eyes remove contact lenses if worn flush with water for 15 minut
300. tep door unlocking Your vehicle comes with two step unlocking enabled With the vehicle locked unlocking can be switched between two step and one step door unlocking by pressing and holding both the A and 2 buttons simultaneously on the remote entry transmitter for approximately four seconds and release The park lamps will flash twice to indicate that the vehicle has switched to one step unlocking Repeat the procedure to switch back to two step unlocking 83 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Locking the doors amp 1 Press e and release to lock all the doors If all doors are closed the park lamps will flash once 2 Press and release again within three seconds to confirm that all the doors are closed and locked Note The doors will lock again the park lamps will flash and the horn will chirp once If any door is ajar the park lamps will not flash and the horn will chirp twice Car finder Press twice within three seconds The horn will chirp and the turn lamps will flash It is recommended that this method be used to locate your vehicle rather than using the panic alarm Sounding a panic alarm Press 9 to activate the alarm Press the control again or turn the ignition to the accessory or on position to deactivate the alarm Note The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is in the off position Replacing the battery The remote entry transmitter uses
301. ter the hearing You are not bound by the decision but should you choose to accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision Ford must abide by the accepted decision as well Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually decided within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB BBB AUTO LINE Application Using the information provided below please call or write to request a program application You will be asked 253 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance for your name and address general information about your new vehicle information about your warranty concerns and any steps you have already taken to try to resolve them A Customer Claim Form will be mailed that will need to be completed signed and returned to the BBB along with proof of ownership Upon receipt the BBB will review the claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at 1 800 955 5100 or writing to BBB AUTO LINE 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington Virginia 22203 1833 BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be requested by calling the Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center at 1 800 392 3673 Note Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations modify procedures or to discontinue this process at any time without notice and without obligation UTILIZING THE MEDIATION ARBITRATION PROGRAM CANADA ONLY F
302. the SET ACCEL control to operate the Tap Up function Press and release this control to increase the vehicle set speed in increments by 1 mph 1 6 km h Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed When the vehicle reaches that speed press and release the SET ACCEL control Reducing speed while using speed control There are two ways to reduce a set speed Press and hold the COAST control until you get to the rs desired speed then release the control You can also use the COAST control to operate the Tap Down function Press and release this control to decrease the vehicle set speed in increments by 1 mph 1 6 km h Depress the brake pedal until the desired vehicle speed is reached press the SET ACCEL control CE 67 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Turning off speed control There are two ways to turn off the speed control e Depress the brake pedal This will not erase your vehicle s previously set speed Press the speed control OFF control Note When you turn off the speed control or the ignition your speed control set speed memory is erased UPFITTER CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with the Upfitter option package which will provide four switches mounted AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4 in the center of the instrument 3 S 3 X panel labeled AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 s X 5 rs rs and AUX 4 These switches will only
303. to a freeze point of 34 F 36 C Coolant concentration testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester such as the Rotunda Battery and Antifreeze Tester 014 R1060 The level of coolant should be maintained at the FULL COLD level or within the COLD FILL RANGE in the coolant reservoir If the level falls below add coolant per the instructions in the Adding engine coolant section Your vehicle was factory filled with a 50 50 engine coolant and water concentration If the concentration of coolant falls below 40 or above 60 the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly A 50 50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following e Freeze protection down to 34 F 36 C e Boiling protection up to 265 F 129 C e Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion e Proper function of calibrated gauges 275 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications When the engine is cold check the level of the engine coolant in the reservoir COLD FILL LEVEL T e The engine coolant should be at the FULL COLD level or within the COLD FILL RANGE as listed on the engine coolant reservoir depending upon application Refer to scheduled maintenance information for service interval schedules e Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your vehicle in this chapter If the engine coolant has not
304. to automatically change slightly with vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise Recommended level is 3 SPEED OFF turns the feature off and level 7 is the maximum setting TRACK FOLDER MODE Available only on MP3 discs in CD mode In track mode press SEEK SEEK to scroll through all tracks on the disc In folder mode press d SEEK SEEK B gt to scroll through tracks within the selected folder Press gt FOLDER FOLDER gt to access the previous next folder if available COMPRESS Compression Available only in CD MP3 mode Press MENU until COMPRESS ON OFF appears in the display Use A IV to toggle ON OFF When COMPRESS is ON the system will bring the soft and loud CD passages together for a more consistent listening level 4 AUX Press repeatedly to reach LINE IN auxiliary audio mode ax For location and further information on auxiliary audio mode refer to Auxiliary input jack later in this chapter 24 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 5 SEEK In radio mode press lt q o to access the e po previous next strong station In CD mode press d o to access the previous next CD track 6 1 OK ra Play Pause This control is operational in CD MP3 mode When a CD MP3 is playing press to pause or play the current CD MP3 The CD MP3 status will display in the radio display OK Use in various menu selections 7 SHUFFLE
305. to on the light will illuminate for three seconds to ensure the bulb is working If the light does not turn on or begins to flash have the system inspected by your authorized dealer For more information on this system refer to Tire pressure monitoring system TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter AdvanceTrac if equipped Flashes two times per second Low tire pressure warning if 0 O when the AdvanceTrac with RSC system is active If the light remains on or SERVICE RSC NOW is displayed in the odometer display with a chime have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer Flashes one time every two seconds when AdvanceTrac with RSC system has not yet initialized and is not available For further information refer to AdvanceTrac Electronic stability control with Roll stability control RSC in the Driving chapter WARNING If your vehicle is equipped with the AdvanceTrac with RSC system then it was designed to be operated with RSC Reduce speed and proceed to an authorized dealer to have the system serviced immediately Transmission Tow Haul Feature TOW if equipped Illuminates when HAUL the Tow Haul feature has been activated Refer to the Driving chapter for transmission function and operation If the light flashes steadily have the system serviced immediately damage to the transmission could occur 15 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA f
306. to the BBB AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act or to the extent allowed by state law before pursuing replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws This dispute handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurchase laws IN CALIFORNIA U S ONLY California Civil Code Section 1793 2 d requires that if a manufacturer or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the vehicle s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of attempts the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or payable by the consumer less a reasonable allowance for consumer use The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund or replacement vehicle 252 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance California Civil Code Section 1793 22 b presumes that the manufacturer has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its applicable express warranties if within the first 18 months of ownership of a new vehicle or the first 18 000 miles 29 000 km whichever occurs first 1 Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non conformity li
307. torcraft or other certified fuel filler cap is not used WARNING The fuel system may be under pressure If the fuel filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound wait until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap Otherwise fuel may spray out and injure you or others WARNING If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap excessive vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision which may result in personal injury FFV Flex Fuel Vehicle fuel cap If your vehicle is FFV capable it will have a yellow colored fuel cap bp 285 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Choosing the right fuel If your vehicle is a flexible fuel vehicle FFV use only UNLEADED FUEL and FUEL ETHANOL Ed 75 Ed85 If your vehicle is not a flexible fuel vehicle FFV then only use UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum of 1096 ethanol Do not use fuel ethanol E85 diesel methanol leaded fuel or any other fuel The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law and could damage your vehicle Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic compounds including manganese based additives Note Use of any fuel other than those recommended may cause powertrain damage a loss of vehicle performance and repairs may not be covered under warranty Cleaner air Ford endorses th
308. tremely hazardous under certain conditions Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes WARNING The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static electricity which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an ungrounded fuel container 283 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Refueling WARNING Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause severe injuries To help avoid injuries to you and others Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island e Turn off your engine when you are refueling e Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle e Keep sparks flames and smoking materials away from fuel e Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling your vehicle this is against the law in some places e Keep children away from the fuel pump never let children pump fuel Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build up when filling an ungrounded fuel container e Place approved fuel container on the ground e DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle including the cargo area e Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while filling e DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill position Fuel filler cap Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed design with a 1 4 turn on off feature When fueling
309. turn must be made remember to avoid over driving your vehicle i e turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid the emergency Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control not more Additionally smooth variations of the accelerator and or brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are called for Avoid abrupt steering acceleration or braking which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover and or personal injury Use all available road surface to return the vehicle to a safe direction of travel e n the event of an emergency stop avoid skidding the tires and do not attempt any sharp steering wheel movements WARNING Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and four wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a lower center of gravity Utility and four wheel drive vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off road conditions Avoid sharp turns excessive speed and abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another i e from concrete to gravel there will be a change in the way the vehicle responds to a maneuver steeri
310. uide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Location Rating chassis 46 10A PCM keep alive power Canister OS J e T on PO Notused vehicle run start relay coil 54 10A Fuel pump relay coil gas engine only 59 JjNotued One Touch Integrated Start O0 i s pL Auxiliary battery diode 604 jNotused PG 20A Power point 3 left hand B pillar 65 soam Modified venice 231 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Protected Circuits ae a e PD Noted 70 30A Stripped chassis 71 i PNotused PB Noted 78 15A VPWR 4 gas engine only Ignition coil diesel engine only Fuel pump relay coil VPWR 5 Transmission 10A Cluster run start stripped chassis only 82 Noted O 83 Fuel pump diode 84 JNtued O CHANGING THE TIRES If you get a flat tire while driving do not apply the brake heavily Instead gradually decrease your speed Hold the steering wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road Note The tire pressure monitoring system TPMS indicator light will illuminate when the spare tire is in use To restore the full functionality of the monitoring system all road wheels equipped with tire pressure monitoring sensor
311. uide Supplement for more information OIL LIFE CHANGE SOON Displayed when the engine oil life remaining is 5 or less When oil life left is between 5 and 0 the ENGINE OIL CHANGE SOON message will be displayed OIL CHANGE REQUIRED Displayed when the oil life left reaches 0 the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message will be displayed OIL LIFE OK displays after you have changed the oil 77 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security KEYS The key operates all locks on your vehicle You should always carry a second key with you in a safe place in case you require it in an emergency If your vehicle is equipped with the SecuriLock M Passive Anti theft system your keys are electronically coded to your vehicle using a non coded key will not permit your vehicle to start If you lose your dealer supplied keys replacement keys are available through your authorized dealer POWER DOOR LOCKS IF EQUIPPED Press control to unlock all doors Press control to lock all doors l Memory lock If you lock your doors with the power lock switch or the remote transmitter while the sliding door is open the door will automatically lock after it is closed Autolock feature Note Your vehicle comes with the autolock feature disabled The autolock feature will lock all the doors when e all the doors are closed e the ignition is in the on position e you shift into any gear putting the vehicl
312. ulb socket counterclockwise and remove 4 Carefully pull the bulb straight out of the socket To complete installation follow the removal procedures in reverse order 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus 53 Lights Replacing side marker bulbs 1 Make sure the headlamp control is in the off position 2 Remove the headlamp assembly Refer to Replacing headlamp bulbs in this section Aerodynamic Sealed beam 3 Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove 4 Carefully pull the bulb straight out of the socket To complete installation follow the removal procedures in reverse order 54 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights Replacing high mount brakelamp bulbs On vehicles without a rear headliner the interior cargo lamp if equipped will have to be removed from under the high mount brakelamp assembly located inside the vehicle Then do the following 1 Remove the two screws from the S high mount brakelamp assembly and lift the lamp from the vehicle 2 Remove the bulb socket from the lamp assembly by turning counterclockwise 3 Carefully pull the bulb straight out of the socket To install the new bulb follow the removal procedure in reverse order Replacing license plate lamp bulbs 1 Turn the headlamp switch to the off position 2 Remove the two screws and the license plate
313. ults in deployment of front airbags and safety belt pretensioners Front safety belt height adjustment The front seat and outboard positions are equipped with a height adjuster Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder To adjust the shoulder belt height push the button and slide the height adjuster down Release the button and pull down on the height adjuster to make sure it is locked in place To adjust the belt upward slide the adjuster up Pull down on the height adjuster to make sure it is locked in place 102 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder Failure to adjust the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and increase the risk of injury in a collision Safety belt warning light and indicator chime A The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts Conditions of operation The driver s safety belt is not The safety belt warning light buckled before the ignition illuminates and the warning chime switch is turned to the on sounds 4 8 seconds position The driver s safety belt is The safety belt warning light and buckled while the indicator warning chime turn off light is ill
314. uminated and the warning chime is sounding The driver s safety belt is The safety belt warning light and the buckled before the ignition warning chime will remain off switch is turned to the on position Belt Minder The Belt Minder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt warning function This feature provides additional reminders to the driver that the driver s safety belt is unbuckled by intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster 103 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The driver s safety belt is not The Belt Minder feature is activated buckled approximately the safety belt warning light 5 seconds after the safety belt illuminates and the warning chime warning light has turned off sounds for 6 seconds every 30 seconds repeating for approximately 5 minutes or until safety belt is buckled The driver s safety belt is The Belt Minder feature will not buckled while the safety belt activate indicator light is illuminated and the safety belt warning chime is sounding The driver s safety belt is The Belt Minder feature will not buckled before the ignition activate switch is turned to the ON position The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts All statistics based on U S data Reasons given Consider Crashes are rare e
315. up engine noises or knock may be experienced It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter or another with equivalent performance for your engine application BATTERY Your vehicle is equipped with a Motorcraft maintenance free battery which normally does not require additional water during its life of service WARNING This vehicle may be equipped with more than one battery removal of cable from only one battery does not disconnect the vehicle electrical system Be sure to disconnect cables from all batteries when disconnecting power Failure to do so may cause serious personal injury or property damage If your battery has a cover shield make sure it is reinstalled after the battery has been cleaned or replaced For longer trouble free operation keep the top of the battery clean and dry Also make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to the battery terminals If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals remove the cables from the terminals and clean with a wire brush You can neutralize the acid with a solution of baking soda and water When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed the transmission must learn its adaptive strategy As a result of this the transmission may shift firmly This operation is considered normal and will fully update transmission operation to its optimum shift feel Note Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to th
316. uring extreme high ambient temperatures when idling stationary for extended periods of time in gear it is recommended to run the A C in the MAX A C position turn off the rear A C unit if equipped reduce blower fan speed from the highest setting and put the vehicle s transmission into the PARK gear position to continue to receive cool air from your A C system To aid in side window defogging demisting in cold weather 1 Select MIX 2 Set the temperature control to maintain comfort 3 Set the fan speed to HI REAR FAN SPEED ADJUSTMENT IF EQUIPPED The rear fan controls adjust the volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle 38 eH 19 e OFF o Y 44 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights HEADLAMP CONTROL XX Turns the lamps off p Turns on the parking lamps instrument panel lamps license plate lamps and tail lamps ZD Turns the headlamps on Daytime running lamps DRL if equipped Turns the headlamps on with a reduced output To activate e the ignition must be in the on position and e the headlamp control is in the off or parking lamp position A WARNING Always remember to turn on your headlamps at A dusk or during inclement weather The Daytime Running Lamp DRL system does not activate the tail lamps and generally may not provide adequate lighting during these conditions Failure to activate your headlamps under these conditions may resu
317. us Instrument Cluster Anti theft system Flashes when A the SecuriLock Passive Anti theft System has been activated f A Overdrive off if equipped 0 D Illuminates when the overdrive function of the transmission has OFF been turned off refer to the Driving chapter If the light does not illuminate have the transmission serviced soon or damage may occur Charging system RTT Displays when the battery is not charging properly Dni Speed control Illuminates when the speed control is activated Turns off when the speed control system is deactivated Low fuel RTT Displays when the fuel level in the fuel tank is at TRIP XXX X or near empty refer to Fuel gauge n in this chapter Turn signal Illuminates when the left or right turn signal or the gt hazard lights are turned on If the indicators stay on or flash faster check for a burned out bulb D Key in ignition warning chime Sounds when the key is left in the ignition in the off or accessory position and the driver s door is opened High beams Illuminates when the high beam headlamps are turned on Headlamps on warning chime Sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are on the ignition is off the key is not in the ignition and the driver s door is opened 16 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Parking brake on warning chime Sounds when the parking brake is
318. ust the right mirror and rotate the control counterclockwise to adjust the left mirror 2 Move the control in the direction you wish to tilt the mirror 3 Return to the center position to lock mirrors in place Spotter mirror if equipped Note New spotter mirrors may be stiff requiring several cycles before the spotter adjustment effort eases Spotter mirror on standard mirror if equipped The spotter mirror only can be tilted from top to bottom Move the lower A JT mirror manually up down to increase U 7 side and rear visibility Apply pressure only in the center of the A spotter mirror along the top or bottom edges to adjust the tilt feature Do not apply any force on the left or right edges of the standard mirror spotter section as this may lead to a mirror fracture 64 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Spotter mirror on telescoping mirror if equipped The spotter mirror has a swivel that allows it to tilt up and down and also to tilt left and right to increase side and rear visibility Fold away mirrors Driver Controls The mirrors can be manually folded forward or backwards for narrow spaces like driving through an automatic car wash or backing out of a garage with the trailer tow mirror AY N N The telescoping feature if equipped allows the mirror to extend approximately 3 15 inches 80 mm This feature is especially useful to the driver
319. uxiliary equipment called power take off or PTO is often added to the engine or transmission to operate utility equipment Examples include a wheel lift for tow trucks cranes tools for construction or tire service and pumping fluids PTO applications draw auxiliary horsepower from the powertrain often while the vehicle is stationary In this condition there is limited cooling air flow through the radiator and around the vehicle that normally occurs when a vehicle is moving The aftermarket PTO system installer having the most knowledge of the final application is responsible for determining whether additional chassis heat protection or powertrain cooling is required and alerting the user to the safe and proper operation Your vehicle is qualified for use as a stationary power source within limits detailed in the Ford Truck Body Builders Layout Book found at www fleet ford com truckbbas and through the Ford Truck Body Builders Advisory Service Gas engine vehicles are qualified for up to 10 minutes of continuous operation as a stationary power source due to the potential for the normal venting of fuel vapors For stationary PTO operation of extended duration beyond 10 minutes diesel engine is recommended Further consult your aftermarket PTO installer since the duration of operation limit for the aftermarket PTO may be less than the vehicle is capable of 219 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving
320. ve fuel economy information printed on the window sticker EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM 7 Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust emission standards To make sure that the catalytic converter and other emission control components continue to work properly e Use only the specified fuel listed e Avoid running out of fuel e Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving especially at high speeds e Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information performed according to the specified schedule The scheduled maintenance items listed in scheduled maintenance information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system If other than Ford Motorcraft or Ford authorized parts are used for maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting emission control such non Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability 291 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications WARNING Do not park idle or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system which can start a fire Illumination of the Service engine soon CY indicator charging system warning light or the temperature warn
321. vents 36700 crashes occur every day The more we drive the more we are exposed to rare events even for good drivers 1 in 4 of us will be seriously injured in a crash during our lifetime Tm not going far 3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25 miles of home Belts are uncomfortable We design our safety belts to enhance comfort If you are uncomfortable try different positions for the safety belt upper anchorage and seatback which should be as upright as possible this can improve comfort 104 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints was in a hurry Prime time for an accident Belt Minder reminds us to take a few seconds to buckle up Safety belts don t work Safety belts when used properly reduce risk of death to front seat occupants by 4596 in cars and by 6096 in light trucks Traffic is light Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in single vehicle crashes many when no other vehicles are around Belts wrinkle my clothes Possibly but a serious crash can do much more than wrinkle your clothes particularly if you are unbelted The people I m with don t Set the example teen deaths occur 4 wear belts times more often in vehicles with TWO or MORE people Children and younger brothers sisters imitate behavior they see T have an airbag Airbags offer greater protection when used with safety belts Frontal airbags are not design
322. warning light flashing four times per second for three seconds again b After receiving confirmation the deactivation activation procedure is complete Safety belt extension assembly If the safety belt is too short when fully extended there is a 9 inch 23 cm or 12 inch 31 cm safety belt extension assembly that can be added part number 611C22 This assembly can be obtained from an authorized dealer Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety belt Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on the label Also use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too short for you when fully extended Use the shortest extender assembly that will provide adequate fit WARNING Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt across the torso AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM SRS Zo DO EEEE 107 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Important SRS precautions The SRS is designed to work with the safety belt to help protect the driver and right front passenger from certain upper body injuries Airbags DO NOT inflate slowly there is a risk of injury from a deploying airbag WARNING All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always properly wear their safety belts even when an air bag supplemental restraint system SRS is provided WARNIN
323. when towing a trailer 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus 4 65 Driver Controls SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED With speed control set you can maintain a set speed without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal WARNING Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding slippery or unpaved Setting speed control The controls for using your speed control are located on the steering wheel for your convenience 1 Press the ON control and release it 2 Accelerate to the desired speed 3 Press the SET ACCEL control and release it 4 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal Note e Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a steep hill If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill you may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph 16 km h below your set speed on an uphill your speed control will disengage Resuming a set speed Press the RES resume control and release it This will automatically return the vehicle to the previously set speed 66 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Increasing speed while using speed control There are two ways to set a higher Speed Press and hold the SET ACCEL control until you get to the desired speed then release the control You can also use
324. y reads AUTOLOAD Load the desired disc label side up The system will prompt you to load discs for the remaining available slots Insert the discs one at a time label side up when prompted Note An MP3 disc with folders will show F001 folder T001 track in the display An MP3 disc without folders will show T001 track in the display Refer to MP3 track and folder structure later in this chapter for further information 18 amp CD eject To eject a disc from the system press amp Select the correct slot number using memory presets 1 6 When ready the system will eject the disc and the display will read REMOVE CD If the disc is not removed in 15 seconds the system will reload the disc If there is only one disc present in the system press amp To auto eject up to six CDs press and hold amp until the system begins ejecting all loaded discs If the discs are not removed the system will reload the discs 33 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 19 CD slot Insert a CD label side SSF up Auxiliary input jack if equipped WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The driver s primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices n
325. y not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly 156 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading The Tire Pressure Monitoring System complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation WARNING The Tire Pressure Monitoring System is NOT a substitute for manually checking tire pressure The tire pressure should be checked periodically at least monthly using a tire gauge see Inflating your tires in this chapter Failure to properly maintain your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure loss of control vehicle rollover and personal injury Changing tires with TPMS Each road tire is equipped with a tire pressure sensor fastened to the inside rim of the wheel The pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is not visible unles
326. y system allows you to lock or unlock all vehicle doors without a key Note The lock and unlock features work when the ignition is in any position The panic feature is active when the ignition is in either the accessory off or on positions If there are problems with the remote entry system make sure to take ALL remote entry transmitters with you to the authorized dealer in order to aid in troubleshooting the problem Note If the vehicle is equipped with the E Guard Cargo Protection System M the remote transmitter Unlock command will only unlock the front doors the only way to unlock the side or rear cargo doors from outside the vehicle is with the key Two step door unlocking f 1 Press c and release to unlock the driver s door Note The interior lamps will illuminate if the control on the overhead lamp is not set to the off position 2 Press and release again within three seconds to unlock the passenger doors and the rear cargo doors The battery saver feature will turn off the interior lamps 30 minutes after the ignition is turned to the off position One step door unlocking If the one step door unlocking feature is activated press C and release once to unlock the passenger doors and the rear cargo doors Note The interior lamps will illuminate refer to the Illuminated entry feature later in this section if the control on the overhead lamp is not set to the off position Switching from two step to one s
327. ys set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the lock position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle 206 2009 Econoline eco Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving WARNING If the parking brake is fully released but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated the brakes may not be working properly See your authorized dealer Understanding the gearshift positions of the 4 speed automatic transmission P RNQ 21 l EES This vehicle is equipped with an adaptive Transmission Shift Strategy Adaptive Shift Strategy offers the optimal transmission operation and shift quality When the vehicle s battery has been disconnected for any type of service or repair the transmission will need to relearn the normal shift strategy parameters much like having to reset your radio stations when your vehicle battery has been disconnected The Adaptive Transmission Strategy allows the transmission to relearn these operating parameters This learning process could take several transmission upshifts and downshifts during this learning process slightly firmer shifts may occur After this learning process normal shift feel and shift scheduling will resume P Park This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from turning To put your vehicle in gear e Start the engine e Depress the brake pedal e Move the gearshift lever into the desired ge

Ford 2009 E-150 Automobile User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents